Tektronix Camcorder 2200 User Manual

Operation Reference  
Grass Valley Model 2200  
Video Production Switcher  
Software Release 5.3  
071-0154-00  
First Printing: December 1995  
Revised Printing: February, 1998  
Contents  
Preface  
Organization of This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii  
Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv  
Section 1 — System Overview  
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Video Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Description of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14  
Chromatte Advanced Chroma Keyer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14  
BORDERLINE Key Edge Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14  
iii  
Contents  
Secondary Wipe Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14  
Effects Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15  
Look Ahead Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15  
Key Type Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22  
Key Source Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25  
Split Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26  
Other Key Modifier Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26  
Borderline Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27  
Auto Preview Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29  
Mask Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29  
iv  
Wipe Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70  
Wipe Pattern Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71  
Wipe Positioner Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71  
Masks Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73  
Mask Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74  
Mask Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74  
Mask Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75  
v
Contents  
Output Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79  
Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101  
Rear Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102  
Remote Aux Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102  
Chop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102  
Joy Stick Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103  
Programming the Joy Stick Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103  
Effects Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104  
vi  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Menu Display Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Processor Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22  
For devices which must be set up manually: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35  
DPM K’SCOPE Sources Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36  
DPM Map Aux Buses Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37  
DPM Map Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41  
Mapping DPM Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43  
Peripheral Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44  
GPI Outputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48  
vii  
Contents  
Aux Bus Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49  
Example 1 – Inserting a Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96  
Effect Run with Auto Run On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99  
Pause on First or Last Keyframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100  
Aux Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102  
Mask Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104  
Matte Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105  
Matte Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106  
viii  
Signal Processing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129  
Safe Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130  
Load File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134  
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control  
Path Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Tension Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Continuity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6  
Bias Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9  
Index  
ix  
Contents  
x
Preface  
Welcome to the Model 2200  
This Model 2200 Operation Reference provides detailed information  
about the control panel functions and associated menu selections  
used to operate the Model 2200-2 Component Digital Switching  
Systems.  
The Model 2200 document library set consists of:  
Operation Reference  
User Guide  
Installation and Service Manual  
Drawings Manual  
Replacement Parts List  
Installation and Planning Guide (optional)  
The Model 2200 Operation Reference lists and briefly describes  
every button, knob, control, lever, and menu selection the  
switcher has to offer. Use this manual in conjunction with the  
Model 2200 User Guide when learning switcher functions, and/ or  
as a reference and “memory jogger” during daily switcher  
operation.  
xi  
   
Preface  
The Model 2200 User Guide contains a system overview, software  
configuration, startup, switcher concepts, and task-oriented  
procedures for switcher functions. This book may be used when  
learning about, or enhancing your knowledge of, switcher  
operations.  
The Model 2200 Installation and Service manual contains a hardware  
overview, hardware system installation instructions, general  
maintenance information, and functional descriptions of the  
Signal Processor Frame and Control Panel power supplies,  
modules and mezzanine circuit boards.  
Organization of This Manual  
This manual is organized as follows:  
Control Panel Descriptions – Describes the Model 2200 control  
panel functions.  
Menu Descriptions – Describes all software menus used to set  
up switcher parameters.  
Menu Trees – Graphical depiction of switcher hierarchical menu  
structure.  
xii  
 
How to Use this Manual  
How to Use this Manual  
This reference manual assumes you have read, or understood, the  
contents of the User Guide and the System Overview and  
Functional Descriptions in the Installation and Service manual, so  
that you will be familiar with the basic terminology used in this  
manual and the structure of the hardware/ software system.  
If you are a switcher pro, and you know the switcher like the back  
of your hand, then youll probably dive right in, referring  
occasionally to this book and the User Guide.  
If you are not a switcher pro, you should read or scan the Control  
Panel Descriptions section to get an idea of the functions of the  
switcher subpanels and controls.  
For quickly locating specific areas of interest, refer to the Table of  
Contents at the front of each manual section. This “local” table of  
contents is provided behind each tabbed divider so that you dont  
have to go all the way to the front of the manual to locate the  
information in a particular section.  
If you have any comments about this manual, we would like to  
hear from you. Please write to:  
Tektronix, Inc.  
Grass Valley Products  
Technical Publications Department  
PO Box 1114  
Grass Valley, CA 95945  
xiii  
 
Preface  
Conventions Used in this Manual  
The following graphical and typestyle conventions are used  
throughout this manual.  
Button References  
A control panel button is shown as follows:  
Bkgd  
A
Or, when used in the text, is shown in boldface type:  
BKGD A  
Panel Knob References  
Similarly, a control panel knob is shown as follows:  
Brightness  
Or, when used in the text, is shown in boldface type:  
BRIGHTNESS  
xiv  
     
Conventions Used in this Manual  
Menu References  
Many Model 2200 features may be accessed via the menu display  
and its associated “soft” buttons and “soft” knobs. The term “soft”  
means that the function of the button or knob is assigned via the  
currently displayed menu.  
An illustration similar to the following may be used when you  
need to access a function via the menu  
NUMBER OF CHANNELS  
DPM MAP AUX BUSES MENU  
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map aux buses  
= 2  
Connection of physical AUX buses  
to physical channels  
CHANNEL 1  
= AUX 3  
MISC  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CHAN 1 CHAN 2  
CHAN 3 CHAN 4 CHAN 5 CHAN 6 CHAN 7 CHAN 8  
DPM 1  
DPM 2  
DPM 3  
DPM 4  
AUX 1  
AUX 2  
AUX 3  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
AUX 4  
AUX 5  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DPM 2  
DEVICE  
SELECT  
EXIT  
NOTE: For clarity, menus shown in the body of this manual will not  
display the “soft knobs” (the 4 shaded circles to the right of the menu), or  
the “soft buttons” (the 9 shaded boxes below the menu). The function  
labels (for example, “DEVICE SELECT”, and “NUMBER OF  
CHANNELS”) will remain.  
NOTE: The four buttons shown adjacent to the soft knobs are used with  
the Krystal DPM functions (that is, the Model 2200-i) when so  
configured.  
xv  
 
Preface  
xvi  
System Overview  
1
This section presents a general description of the Grass Valley  
Products Model 2200-2 Production Component Digital Switching  
Systems.  
The Control Panel and Signal Processor descriptions provide a  
basic knowledge of the Model 2200 basic architecture.  
Basic Architecture  
The Model 2200 is a component digital switcher. It can manipulate  
CCIR 601 serial component digital and analog component video  
and key signals through the use of 10-bit digital processing. An  
Analog Chroma Keyer Input Module is also available.  
The Model 2200-2 provides two full function mix/ effects  
subsystems. Up to 32 serial digital inputs which can be mapped to  
switcher crosspoint buttons and used as video and/ or key  
sources. Internal sources are also available, such as Black, Masks,  
Color Bars, and Background.  
Effects animation functionality may be used to build and run a  
sequence of effects. Effects are stored in E-MEM registers as a list  
of “keyframes” (see the User Guide), for a definition of  
Keyframes). The E-MEM register operations are used to learn,  
recall, copy, and link effect registers.  
The layout of the Control Panel is logically structured for efficient  
control of video signals.The Menu Display Subpanel allows quick  
changes to switcher system parameters.  
1-1  
   
Section 1 — System Overview  
Standard Features  
2 Mix/ Effects Systems  
Auto-Timed Inputs  
Shaped and Unshaped Video Input Conditioning  
Fineline Keying  
Key Channel Throughout  
10-Bit Data Processing Throughout  
Full Complement of Wipe Patterns  
E-MEM with Disk Storage  
100 E-MEM registers for Keyframe effects  
Multiple-event Keyframes/ Effects within a single E-MEM  
Register  
User-Preference Programming  
Safe Title / Area Generators  
Extensive Masking  
Complex Matte Generators  
Analog Output Program/ Preview Capability  
Default switcher state —User defined or GVG factory setting  
Chroma Key Auto Setup  
1-2  
   
Optional Features  
Optional Features  
BORDERLINE on all Keyers  
Dual Chroma Keyers for each M/ E  
Second Wipe Pattern Generator for each M/ E  
1
Kaleidoscope Run Control and Effects Recall  
Two-Channel Effects Send  
Three Additional Timed Aux Buses  
Key Outputs  
Preview Outputs  
Tally Outputs  
DPM Port  
Redundant Power Supplies  
Module Extenders  
Refer to the end of this section for descriptions of the optional  
features.  
1. Requires a GVG Kaleidoscope DPM and the Kaleidoscope Interface Upgrade Kit (cur-  
rently shipped, to customers who have purchased Kaleidoscope, with the 4.0 Software Re-  
lease Package, Part No. 074825-07).  
1-3  
   
Section 1 — System Overview  
Physical Description  
The switcher consists of three main areas: the Control Panel, the  
Signal Processor Frame, and the Frame Power Supply (see s) The  
electronic circuitry for the Model 2200 is contained on circuit  
boards and modules in the Signal Processor Frame and Control  
Panel.  
Signal Processor Frame  
The Signal Processor Frame is a large rack-mounted unit that  
houses the system Controller, Mix/ Effect logic and processors,  
Input/ Output interfaces, and Expansion circuit modules.  
In addition to the basic system, a typical system may have several  
options such as Chroma Keyers, Secondary Wipe Generators, and  
Effects Send. Most options are available as circuit board modules  
(or submodules called “mezzanine” boards) that are installed in  
the Signal Processor Frame.  
Refer to the Model 2200 Installation and Service manual for a  
complete description of the Signal Processor.  
A main processor and separate M/ E processors reside within the  
Signal Processor Frame. Since each M/ E has its own processor,  
failure of one processor does not disable the entire switcher.  
Individual effects can continue to operate independently in a  
limited capacity.  
1-4  
     
Physical Description  
EFFECTS SEND  
MATRIX  
MIX EFFECTS  
PROCESSOR  
Video/Key  
Signals In  
Video/Key  
Signals Out  
MIX EFFECTS  
PROCESSOR  
MIX EFFECTS  
PROCESSOR  
Signal  
Processor  
Frame  
CONTROL  
PROCESSOR  
Processor Frame  
Power Supply  
CONTROL  
PANEL  
LOGIC  
Status  
Terminal  
CONTROL PANEL  
POWER SUPPLY  
Control Panel  
Figure 1-1. Simplified Block Diagram of the Model 2200  
1-5  
Section 1 — System Overview  
Control Panel  
The Control Panel is the operator interface for the Model 2200  
system. The operator performs all actions via buttons and knobs  
and a software-driven menu.  
External Interface  
Chroma Keyer  
Y
Effect  
Switcher  
R
Editor  
Enable  
GPI  
Enable  
Periph  
Enable  
Effect  
Config  
Picture  
Mixer  
Config  
M/E  
Mode  
M
B
Frame Store  
G
Panel  
Setup  
Picture  
Frame  
Keyer  
C
hroma  
Key  
Drop  
Shadow  
Background  
C
M/E 1  
Sec  
M/E 2  
Sec  
Effect  
Oper  
Key/  
Stencil  
Status  
Wipe  
Horizontal Vertical Opacity  
Position Position  
Wash  
Wash  
Shadow  
On  
Hue/  
Softness  
Freeze  
Grab  
Field  
1
Field  
2
Flat  
Matte  
Matte 2  
E-MEM  
Key  
Frame  
View  
Shadow  
Opacity  
Selectivity  
Auto  
Setup  
Video  
Store  
Key  
Store  
Run  
Control  
Input/  
Output  
Mask  
Matte  
Bkgd  
Supr  
Saturation/  
Offset  
Graphic  
Display  
Path  
Aux  
Bus  
Frame  
Store  
Chroma  
Lum  
M/E 2  
Bkgd  
1
Bkgd  
2
M/E 1  
Key  
M/E 1  
Key  
M/E 2  
Key  
Clear  
Menu  
Disk  
Misc  
1
2
1
Key  
2
Brightness  
Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only  
Pvw  
Aux  
M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 2  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Shift  
M/E 1 M/E 2  
A
Key 1 Key  
2
A
Key 1  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Pgm  
Pgm  
Transition  
Effect  
Effect  
Effect  
Key  
Key  
Key  
1
2
Uncal  
Uncal  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Shift  
Shift  
Shift  
Key  
1
Bkgd  
B
Bkgd  
Key  
2
Key  
Priority  
1
2
3
4
2
3
A
On  
On  
On  
On  
A
B
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Layered  
Over  
Over  
Uncal  
Uncal  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Preset  
Black  
Mix  
Wipe  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Cut  
Auto  
Tran  
60  
GF 1 GF 2 TK 1 RTD1 GF 2  
Transition  
Uncal  
Effect  
Key  
A
Key  
Key  
1
2
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Shift  
Shift  
Shift  
M/E 1  
M/E 1  
M/E 1  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Bkgd  
Bkgd  
A
B
Uncal  
On  
On  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Layered  
Uncal  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Mix  
Cut  
Wipe  
B
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Uncal  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Auto  
Tran  
1-6  
 
Physical Description  
The Control Panel also provides connectors for a status terminal  
and the data link to the Signal Processor Frame.  
Mask  
Wipe  
User  
User  
User  
1
3
5
User  
User  
User  
2
4
6
Soft  
Top/Gain  
Symmetry Softness  
Border  
Aspect  
Left  
Right  
Opacity  
Width  
Menu  
Random  
Texture  
User  
Wipe  
Undo  
Learn  
User  
Wipe  
Bottom/Clip  
Force  
Mask  
Inhibit  
Mask  
Mask  
Invert  
Preset Size Aspect  
Rotate  
Pos  
Rotate  
Speed  
Rotate  
Mag  
Normal  
Reverse  
Flip  
Flop  
Split  
H
Multi  
V
Multi  
Pos  
Norm  
Pos  
Auto  
Box  
Pri  
Wipe  
Sec  
Wipe  
Mask  
Bus  
Rotate  
Rotation Type  
Wipe Direction  
Pattern Modifiers  
Positioner  
Pattern  
Mix  
M/E 1  
Pri  
M/E 1  
Sec  
M/E 2  
Pri  
M/E 2  
Sec  
M/E 1  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E 2  
Key  
1
Key  
2
Key  
1
Key  
2
Model 2200  
Exit  
Pattern Mix  
Delegate  
Preview Only  
Bus Delegate  
2
M/E 2  
Key 2  
Pvw  
Aux  
4
Aux  
5
M/E 1 M/E 2  
Pvw  
Mask Aux  
1
Aux  
2
Aux  
3
Freeze  
Video  
Freeze  
Key  
Near  
Side  
Far  
Side  
Pvw  
Keyer  
Matte  
Pri  
Sec  
Normal  
Border  
Shadow  
Extrude  
Outline  
Source  
T
arget  
World  
Camera  
Axis  
Lock  
Wipe  
Wash  
Wipe  
Wash  
Stop  
Next  
KF  
Borderline  
Size/Position  
Hue/  
Rotate  
Spin  
Locate  
3D  
Size/  
Locate  
Knob  
Control  
Invert  
Inhibit  
Mask  
Force  
Mask  
Show  
Key  
Key  
Over  
Matte 2  
Softness  
Flat  
Matte  
Hold  
Input  
Locate  
Axis  
Split  
Key  
Video  
Key  
Auto  
Select  
Key  
Borderline  
Opacity  
Video  
Fill  
Matte  
Fill  
Reverse  
Rewind  
Run  
K1 Fill  
K2 Fill  
K1 Border  
K2 Border  
Sec Wipe  
Saturation/  
Offset  
Linear  
Key  
Lum  
Key  
C
hroma  
Pri  
Preset  
Pattern  
Sec  
Preset  
Pattern  
Pri Wipe  
Skew  
X
Persp  
Aspect  
Z
Post  
Xform  
Chan 1  
Chan 2  
Global  
Camera  
Key  
Gain  
Clip  
Matte  
Select  
Key  
On  
Bkgd  
B
Bkgd  
A
Key  
2
Key  
1
Center  
M/E 1  
Pri  
M/E 1  
Sec  
M/E 2  
Pri  
M/E 2  
Sec  
Y
Brightness  
Run Control  
Keyer  
Matte  
E-MEM  
Effect  
Effect  
Shadow  
Extrude  
Invert  
Outline  
Pri  
Sec  
Auto  
Recall  
Auto  
Run  
Clear  
Work  
Buffer  
Const  
Dur  
Normal  
Border  
Prev  
Next  
Wipe  
Wash  
Wipe  
Wash  
1345804-42224438  
Borderline  
Key  
1
Key  
2
Key  
Priority  
Size/Position  
Hue/  
Chan 1  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
Lock  
Get  
Put  
Inhibit  
Mask  
Force  
Mask  
Show  
Key  
Enable  
All  
+ / ---  
Cut  
Go  
KF  
To  
Go  
T
o
Key  
Over  
Softness  
Flat  
Matte  
Matte 2  
7
4
1
8
5
2
0
9
Time  
Learn  
On  
Over  
On  
Over  
Chan 2  
Misc  
Bkgd  
Seq  
Bank  
0
1
Copy  
Video  
Fill  
Matte  
Fill  
Split  
Key  
Video  
Key  
Auto  
Select  
Key  
KF  
Dur  
Effect  
Dur  
Borderline  
Opacity  
K1 Fill  
K2 Fill  
K1 Border  
K2 Border  
Sec Wipe  
6
Preset  
Black  
Saturation/  
Offset  
Pri Wipe  
Global  
Effect  
Dis  
Bank  
Time  
Cursor  
Mark  
Cursor  
Paste  
Mark  
Insert  
Before  
Linear  
Key  
Lum  
Key  
C
hroma  
Pri  
Preset  
Pattern  
Sec  
Preset  
Pattern  
3
Key  
Gain  
Clip  
Trim  
Camera  
Key  
On  
Bkgd  
B
Bkgd  
A
Key  
2
Matte  
Select  
Undo  
Tran  
Rate  
Mark  
Block  
Modify  
Insert  
After  
Key  
1
.
Enter  
60  
Bank  
Brightness  
Enables  
Edit  
Figure 1-2. Model 2200-2 Control Panel  
1-7  
Section 1 — System Overview  
Power Supplies  
Two power supplies are used in the basic Model 2200 system: a  
control panel power supply, located in the control panel tub, and  
a 19" rack mount power supply used by the Signal Processor  
Frame. Optional Redundant power supplies are available.  
Video and Key Inputs and Outputs  
Inputs  
Two types of input modules may be installed in the Signal  
Processor Frame to suit the needs of your installation. The  
following types of input modules are available.  
NOTE: Each of the serial or analog inputs can be treated by the switcher  
as either a video input or a key input.  
Serial Digital Input Module – provides 8 inputs, auto-timed  
within a range of ±18 microseconds. Two modules are  
supplied in the standard configuration. Two modules are  
available as options. With four modules installed there are 32  
inputs available.The modules are located in Bay C.  
Chroma Key Input Modules (optional) – Either one or two  
Chroma Key Input Modules may be configured. These  
modules allow full bandwidth chroma keys. Each module has  
two inputs. Each input has three BNC connectors labeled:  
G/ V, B/ U, and R/ V. There is a separate gain adjustment near  
each BNC connector. The format for each input is user-  
selectable from RGB, YUV, Beta or MII. The module is located  
in Bay C.  
Refer to the Model 2200 Installation and Service manual, Section 3,  
Functional Description, for more information.  
Refer to the Model 2200 User Guide for information on assigning  
input formats and adjusting the timing.  
1-8  
       
Physical Description  
Outputs  
Output modules are placed in the rear bay of the Signal Processing  
Frame. The following module types are available:  
Serial Output Modules (2 standard, each adding 8 outputs  
with two BNCs)  
Analog Output Module (1 optional with RGB/ Y, CR, CB and  
Key outputs)  
The standard Digital Output Modules have the following outputs:  
Mask Bus  
Switched Preview Video  
M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 Program Video and Key  
1
2
M/ E 1 Key or M/ E 1 Clean Feed  
M/ E 2 Key or M/ E 2 Clean Feed  
Aux Buses 1A through 2B  
Framestore Video and Key  
The optional Analog Output Module has the following outputs:  
M/ E 2 Program Out  
M/ E 2 Preview Out  
1. No Lookahead Preview Option installed.  
2. Lookahead Preview Option installed.  
1-9  
 
Section 1 — System Overview  
Functional Description  
General Overview  
Figure 1-3 shows a simple video flow diagram for the Model 2200.  
Video and key signals enter the input modules of the Model 2200,  
which consist of component analog and/ or component serial  
digital formats. The analog signals are converted to digital format,  
and all inputs are timed and conditioned.  
The digital signals are then passed to the Video and Effects Section  
where keying and mixing take place. This section also provides  
effect modifications, such as wipes and keyframing, that can be  
applied to selected inputs.  
In the Output Section, digital video and key signals are routed to  
the Serial Digital Output Modules and the optional Analog  
Output Module before leaving the Signal Processor.  
Video Processing  
Input video and key signal selections are made by the Crosspoint  
Matrix under control of the system Controller, according to  
operator assignments entered via the Control Panel.  
In addition to primary (external) video, secondary (internal)  
sources such as Masks, M/ E re-entry video, and optional Effects  
Send are available as inputs to the crosspoint matrix.  
Any suitable component digital signal from the Crosspoint matrix  
may feed the Chromatte™ Chroma Keyer Module option. Analog  
Component signals may also be used as Chroma Key sources.  
Keyers in each Mix/ Effects bank provide outputs to the Mixer  
Interface crosspoints. These outputs may be sent outside the  
switcher for external processing, or may be routed to the M/ E  
mixers and wipe generators. The Effects Send outputs can be  
directed to the Framestore option for image capture.  
1-10  
       
Functional Description  
Each M/ E has two keyers and two background buses (A and B) as  
inputs. In standard mode, Keyers 1 and 2 can be mixed into a  
composite video and key which can be forwarded to the output,  
or M/ E 1 can be reentered into M/ E 2. In layered mode,  
Background Buses A and B are also used as keyers.  
Preview capability allows monitoring of sources at many points in  
the signal flow. You can preview video from the M/ E mixers,  
switched preview bus, or mask bus.  
Eight GPI inputs are provided. You can assign each of the GPI  
inputs via the GPI Input Menu to perform a specific function  
when triggered.  
The editor interface consists of an asynchronous RS-422, 38.4K  
baud serial communications port, managed by a communications  
processor. Refer to the Model 2200/ 3000/ 4000 Serial Protocols  
manual for information on software functions and protocols  
observed by the editor port.  
1-11  
Section 1 — System Overview  
DUAL  
CHROMA KEY  
INPUT  
MODULES  
Component  
DUAL  
CHROMA  
KEYER  
Analog  
Chroma Key  
M/E1  
Inputs  
& M/E2  
Chr. Key  
Aux Bus  
1A-4B  
EFFECTS SEND  
MODULES  
80 X 48  
VIDEO  
CROSSPOINT  
MATRIX  
M/E  
Video  
and  
SERIAL  
DIGITAL  
INPUT  
Video Signals  
In  
Key  
QUAD  
KEYER  
MODULES –  
M/E 1  
& M/E 2  
MIXER  
MODULE  
CROSS-  
POINTS  
MODULES  
Key Signals  
In  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
MODULES  
Frame Store Video and Ke  
M/E Program Video and Ke  
Clocks  
to all  
modules  
Clipped Mask and  
Mask Store Video  
Timing  
Signals  
to all  
Switched Preview and Mask  
ce  
SYNC  
GENERATOR  
Black, Background 1 and 2, and Test Signa  
Program, Preset, and DSK Video and Ke  
gital  
ce  
video  
modules  
Aux Bus 5A-9B Video and Key  
CONTROL PANEL  
To/From  
All Circuits  
CONTROLLER  
(control buses not  
shown for clarity)  
1-12  
Functional Description  
SECONDARY  
WIPE  
OPTION  
Aux Bus 1A-4B  
Video and Key  
M/E 1  
& M/E 2  
MIXERS  
Frame Store  
Video  
and Key  
FRAME STORE  
FOR VIDEO, KEY,  
AND MASK  
STORAGE  
Mask  
Store  
Input  
Mask  
Store  
Output  
SERIAL  
DIGITAL  
AND  
ANALOG  
OUTPUT  
MODULES  
M/E 1 and M/E 2  
Program Video  
and Key  
Outputs (Standard and Option  
M/E Pvw  
Video  
Frame Store Video and Ke  
PREVIEW  
Program  
Video  
& Key  
M/E 1 and M/E 2  
DSK Pvw  
Video  
Program Video and Key  
PGM/PST  
MIXER  
AND  
Program Video and Key  
DUAL DSK  
& Clean  
Feed  
Video  
Clean Feed Video  
DSK Preview Video  
Mask  
Mask and  
Switched Preview  
M/E and DSK Preview  
Switched Preview  
M/E1 and M/E 2  
Preview  
DIAGNOSTIC  
PROBE  
DSK Preview  
NOTE:  
Primary Video Paths are  
Indicated by Wide Arrows  
Aux Bus Video and Key  
Figure 1-3. Video  
1-13  
 
Section 1 — System Overview  
Description of Options  
The following options are currently available for the Model 2200  
switcher. For more details on these options, refer to the  
appropriate subpanel descriptions later in this manual.  
Chromatte Advanced Chroma Keyer  
Each foreground keyer in M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 has access to an  
optional component chroma keyer. Either an internal component  
digital signal or an external component analog signal from one of  
the Chroma Key Input Modules can be used as the chroma key  
source. Color background suppression, foreground suppression  
and shadow processing are included as features.  
BORDERLINE Key Edge Generation  
BORDERLINE® Key Edge Generators are available for each keyer  
in the switcher. The Borderline feature is implemented as a  
submodule that plugs onto the Keyer module of any M/ E.  
Each Borderline generator supports 1, 2, or 3 line wide borders for  
border and outline modes and 1 to 6 line wide edges for shadow  
and extrude modes. Fill within the key edges may be either video  
or matte.  
Secondary Wipe Generator  
A Secondary Wipe Generator option provides a second pattern for  
each M/ E. The Secondary Wipe Generator Submodules mount on  
the M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 Mix/ Wipe Modules.  
1-14  
             
Description of Options  
Effects Send  
Frame Store  
Effects Send provides a method of integrating digital effects  
devices into the switcher mix/ effects system. Up to two send  
channels can be used to route the video and key from an M/ E to  
and from an external digital effects system.  
Using software version 5.3 and later, the Frame Store option takes  
the output of an M/ E Keyer, sends it to the Frame Store module,  
then returns the output of the Frame Store to the Mix/ Wipe circuit  
of the same M/ E in the switcher. This provides the effect of  
inserting the Frame Store right into the M/ E, between the Keyer  
and the Mix/ Wipe systems.  
Look Ahead Preview  
Look ahead preview processing is provided for both M/ Es with  
this option. Submodules mount on the M/ E 1 and M/ E 2  
Mix/ Wipe Modules.  
Tally Relay Frame  
The Tally Relay Frame provides external tally outputs that reflect  
the switcher status. A rear-panel interconnect board provides the  
relay contacts on two connectors for on-air Tally A and on-air Tally  
B. The frame can hold up to three Tally Modules. Pinouts for the  
Tally connectors are given in the Installation section of the Model  
2200 Installation and Service manual.  
1-15  
               
Section 1 — System Overview  
Remote Aux Bus  
The Remote Aux Control Panel Option allows you to control the  
Model 2200’s aux buses from a remote location. As many as 32  
Remote Aux Panels can be daisy-chained to the switcher. There  
are three Remote Aux Panel configurations available, identified by  
the number of rack units (RUs) each occupies in the equipment  
rack.  
The panels are designed to control 32 external inputs (16 unshifted  
and 16 shifted).  
Timed Aux Output  
The Timed Aux Output Module provides four independent  
output pairs (video/ key) from aux buses 5A through 8B for use  
with Kaleidoscope and DPM systems.  
1-16  
       
Control Panel Descriptions  
2
Introduction  
The Model 2200 Switcher is operated by a control panel  
containing a source-select button matrix, various other groupings  
of controls and a text and graphics menu display.  
This section provides an overview of the Model 2200 control panel  
menus and the functions available through the menus see  
Section 3.  
Control Panel  
Figure 2-1 on page 2-2 shows the control panel and indicates the  
grouping of the controls by operation.  
2-1  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Model 2200-2i  
Use  
Backgrounds  
Page 2-84  
External  
Interface  
Chroma  
Keyer  
Menu  
Selections  
Page 2-82  
Page 2-30  
Section 3  
External Interface  
Chroma Keyer  
Effect  
Switcher  
R
Editor  
Enable  
GPI  
Enable  
Periph  
Enable  
Effect  
Config  
Picture  
Mixer  
Config  
M/E  
Mode  
Y
M
B
Frame Store  
G
Panel  
Setup  
Picture  
Frame  
Keyer  
C
hroma  
Key  
Shadow  
On  
Background  
C
M/E 2  
M/E 1  
Sec  
Wash  
Sec  
Effect  
Oper  
Key/  
Stencil  
Status  
Wipe  
Horizontal Vertical Opacity  
Position Position  
Wash  
Shadow  
O
n
Hue/  
Softness  
Freeze  
Grab  
Field  
1
Field  
2
Flat  
Matte  
Matte 2  
E-MEM  
Key  
Frame  
View  
Shadow  
Opacity  
Selectivity  
Auto  
Setup  
Video  
Store  
Key  
Store  
Run  
Control  
Input/  
Output  
Mask  
Matte  
Bkgd  
Supr  
Saturation/  
Graphic  
Display  
Path  
Aux  
Bus  
Frame  
Store  
Chroma  
Lum  
M/E 2  
Floppy  
Disk  
Drive  
Bkgd  
1
Bkgd  
2
M/E 1  
Key  
M/E 1  
Key  
M/E 2  
Key  
Clear  
Menu  
Disk  
Misc  
1
2
1
Key  
2
Brightness  
Page 2-86  
Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only  
Pvw  
Aux  
M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 2  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Shift  
M/E 1 M/E 2  
A
Key 1 Key  
2
A
Key 1  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Pgm  
Pgm  
Preview/  
Mask/Aux  
Bus  
Transition  
Effect  
Effect  
Effect  
Key  
Key  
Key  
1
2
Uncal  
Uncal  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Shift  
Shift  
Shift  
Key  
1
Bkgd  
B
Bkgd  
Key  
2
Key  
Priority  
1
2
3
4
2
3
A
Page 2-87  
On  
On  
On  
On  
A
B
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Layered  
Over  
Over  
Uncal  
Uncal  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Wipe  
Preset  
Black  
Mix  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Cut  
Auto  
Tran  
60  
GF 1 GF 2 TK 1 RTD1 GF 2  
Transition  
Uncal  
Effect  
Key  
A
Key  
Key  
1
2
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Shift  
Shift  
Shift  
M/E 1  
M/E 1  
M/E 1  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Bkgd  
Bkgd  
A
B
Uncal  
On  
On  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Layered  
Uncal  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Mix  
Cut  
Wipe  
B
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Uncal  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Auto  
Tran  
Transition  
Areas  
Page 2-12  
Source Selection  
Page 2-4  
Figure 2-1. Control Panel  
2-2  
 
Menu  
Display  
Wipe  
Area  
Mask  
Area  
Page 2-65  
Section 3  
Page 2-73  
Mask  
Wipe  
User  
User  
User  
1
3
5
User  
User  
User  
2
4
6
Soft  
Top/Gain  
Symmetry Softness  
Border  
Aspect  
Left  
Right  
Opacity  
Width  
Menu  
Random  
Texture  
User  
Wipe  
Undo  
Learn  
User  
Wipe  
Bottom/Clip  
Force  
Mask  
Inhibit  
Mask  
Mask  
Invert  
Preset Size Aspect  
Rotate  
Pos  
Rotate  
Speed  
Rotate  
Mag  
Normal  
Reverse  
Flip  
Flop  
Split  
H
Multi  
V
Multi  
Pos  
Norm  
Pos  
Auto  
Box  
Pri  
Wipe  
Sec  
Wipe  
Mask  
Bus  
Rotate  
Rotation Type  
Wipe Direction  
Pattern Modifiers  
Positioner  
Pattern  
Mix  
M/E 1  
Pri  
M/E 1  
Sec  
M/E 2  
Pri  
M/E 2  
Sec  
M/E 1  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E 2  
Key  
1
Key  
2
Key  
1
Key  
2
Model 2200  
Exit  
Pattern Mix  
Delegate  
Preview Only  
Bus Delegate  
2
M/E 2  
Key 2  
Pvw  
Aux  
4
Aux  
5
M/E 1 M/E 2  
Pvw  
Mask Aux  
1
Aux  
2
Aux  
3
Freeze  
Video  
Freeze  
Key  
Near  
Side  
Far  
Side  
Pvw  
Positioner  
Area  
Keyer  
Matte  
Pri  
Sec  
Normal  
Border  
Shadow  
Extrude  
Outline  
Source  
Target  
World  
Camera  
Axis  
Lock  
Wipe  
Wash  
Wipe  
Wash  
Stop  
Next  
KF  
Page 2-64  
Borderline  
Size/Position  
Hue/  
Rotate  
Spin  
Locate  
3D  
Size/  
Locate  
Knob  
Control  
Invert  
Inhibit  
Mask  
Force  
Mask  
Show  
Key  
Key  
Over  
Matte 2  
Softness  
Flat  
Hold  
Input  
Matte  
Locate  
Axis  
Video  
Fill  
Matte  
Fill  
Split  
Key  
Video  
Key  
Auto  
Select  
Key  
Borderline  
Opacity  
Reverse  
Rewind  
Run  
K1 Fill  
K2 Fill  
K1 Border  
K2 Border  
Sec Wipe  
Saturation/  
Offset  
Linear  
Key  
Lum  
Key  
C
hroma  
Pri  
Preset  
Pattern  
Sec  
Preset  
Pattern  
Pri Wipe  
Skew  
X
Persp  
Y
Aspect  
Z
Post  
Xform  
C
han 1  
C
han 2  
Global  
Camera  
Key  
Model 2200-2i  
Use  
Gain  
Clip  
Matte  
Select  
Key  
On  
Bkgd  
B
Bkgd  
A
Key  
2
Key  
1
Center  
M/E 1  
Pri  
M/E 1  
Sec  
M/E 2  
Pri  
M/E 2  
Sec  
Brightness  
Run Control  
Keyer  
Matte  
E-MEM  
Effect  
Effect  
Shadow  
Extrude  
Invert  
Outline  
Pri  
Sec  
Auto  
Recall  
Auto  
Run  
Clear  
Work  
Buffer  
Const  
Dur  
Normal  
Border  
Prev  
Next  
Wipe  
Wash  
Wipe  
Wash  
1345804-42224438  
Borderline  
Key  
1
Key  
2
Key  
Priority  
Size/Position  
Hue/  
Chan 1  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
Lock  
Get  
Put  
Inhibit  
Mask  
Force  
Mask  
Show  
Key  
Enable  
All  
+ / ---  
Cut  
Go To  
KF  
Go To  
Time  
Key  
Over  
Softness  
Flat  
Matte  
Matte 2  
7
4
1
8
5
2
0
9
Learn  
On  
Over  
On  
Over  
Chan 2  
Misc  
Bkgd  
Seq  
Bank  
0
1
Copy  
Video  
Fill  
Matte  
Fill  
Split  
Key  
Video  
Key  
Auto  
Select  
Key  
KF  
Dur  
Effect  
Dur  
Borderline  
Opacity  
K1 Fill  
K2 Fill  
K1 Border  
K2 Border  
Sec Wipe  
6
Preset  
Black  
Saturation/  
Offset  
Pri Wipe  
Global  
Dis  
Bank  
Time  
Cursor  
Mark  
Cursor  
Paste  
Mark  
Insert  
Before  
Linear  
Key  
Lum  
Key  
C
hroma  
Pri  
Preset  
Pattern  
Sec  
Preset  
Pattern  
3
Key  
Gain  
Clip  
Trim  
Camera  
Key  
On  
Bkgd  
B
Bkgd  
A
Key  
2
Matte  
Select  
Undo  
Tran  
Rate  
Mark  
Block  
Modify  
Insert  
After  
Key  
1
.
Enter  
60  
Bank  
Brightness  
Enables  
Edit  
Keyer  
Areas  
Page 2-21  
Matte  
Areas  
Page 2-33  
Effects Memory  
(E-MEM)  
Area  
Page 2-36  
2-3  
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Source Selection  
The Source Select portion of the control panel consists of Primary  
source select buttons, Secondary (re-entry) source select buttons,  
SHIFT buttons, and Key Bus delegation and uncalibrated  
indicators. (Figure 2-2.) Each vertical column of buttons has the  
same input; each horizontal row is an output. An input is put on  
an output by pressing the button on that output row that has the  
required input. Each input can be named; the first four letters of  
the name are displayed in the LED panel located between the  
M/ E rows.  
Pvw  
Aux  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Shift  
M/E 1 M/E 2  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Pgm  
Pgm  
Key  
Key 1  
Key 2  
Uncal  
Uncal  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Shift  
Shift  
Shift  
1
2
3
4
2
3
A
B
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Uncal  
Uncal  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
1
2
3
4
2
3
GF 1 GF 2 TK 1 RTD1 GF 2  
Uncal  
Key 1  
Key 2  
Uncal  
Key  
A
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Shift  
Shift  
Shift  
M/E 1  
M/E 1  
M/E 1  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Uncal  
1
2
3
4
2
3
B
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Bkgd  
Uncal  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Figure 2-2. Source Select Panel  
2-4  
     
Source Selection  
All buttons in the Source Select region have three levels of  
illumination:  
OFF indicates not selected;  
DIM or “low tally” indicates selected, but not on-air;  
BRIGHT or “high tally” indicates selected and on-air.  
Only one button in each row is illuminated at any time.  
Primary Source Selection (Primary Crosspoints)  
The Source Select Buttons are used to select which of the  
inputs into the switcher will be used in the switcher.  
Each row of primary source selection buttons consists of  
16 buttons. Each can have a designator under a clear  
lens cap.  
Black  
Color  
. . . Bkgd  
Each input, including internally generated signals such as black  
and background, can be mapped to any vertical column of  
crosspoint buttons. Thus, each column of buttons may be  
visualized as an input bus of video or key crosspoints. Each input  
can be treated as either a video signal or a key signal, as defined  
in the Configuration menu.  
The input signals on each input column can be placed on any  
output bus (horizontal row) by pressing the crosspoint button at  
the intersection of the column and row. Any video/ key input may  
be selected on any number of output buses; however each output  
bus can have only one output signal selected on it at one time.  
The SHIFT button located at the right end of each primary source  
selection row is used to access inputs 17 through 32. To select a  
shifted input, hold SHIFT down (button lamp comes on) and press  
a crosspoint button on that bus. The SHIFT button lamp then  
remains lit to show that the selection is a shifted selection. The  
Shift mode will turn off when an unshifted selection is made on  
that bus.  
Shift  
2-5  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Crosspoint Button Caution Indication  
A primary crosspoint button may flash if the timing of a selected  
input cannot be corrected by the automatic input timing circuit.  
This flashing can be disabled through the Configuration menu.  
Secondary Source Selection (Re-entry Crosspoints)  
The secondary source (“M/ E re-entry”) buttons, M/E 1 are located  
at the right of each row of M/ E 2 primary crosspoint buttons. The  
program output of M/ E 1 may be re-entered as an input on an  
M/ E 2 bus by selecting this button as the input.  
M/E 1  
Key Delegation and Uncal Indicators  
Each M/ E has a two key buses but only one row of key bus  
buttons. The keyer bus buttons are delegated to each key bus by  
pressing the key 1 or key 2 button in the keyer subpanel for that  
M/ E.  
The KEY 1 and KEY 2 indicator LEDs, are located at the right of  
each row of keyer crosspoint buttons and light to indicate which  
keyer the row of buttons is currently delegated to control.  
Key 1  
Key 2  
2-6  
           
Source Selection  
Each UNCAL indicator LED, located to the right of each row of  
primary crosspoint buttons, lights if one or more of the following  
variables are set to non-default values for the selected crosspoint  
coring, or horizontal key position.  
Uncal  
LED Display  
The Led displays the first four letters of the input name. The  
inputs are named using the Name File Menu on page 3-138  
Holding down the shift button causes the LEDs to display the  
name of inputs 17 through 32.  
2-7  
   
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Auto Delegation  
Panel Delegation  
Some of the controls on the Model 2200 Switcher are delegated to  
other controls under conditional control of the operator or system.  
delegation is that pressing a button on one subpanel may activate  
the controls on another subpanel of the control panel. For  
example, the single chroma keyer subpanel is used for controlling  
all chroma keyers, and is activated by pressing the CHR KEY  
button on either of the M/ E Keyer subpanels. Auto delegation is  
normally on, but can be turned off via the User Preferences menu.  
Table 2-1 shows some of the delegations present in the Model 2200  
Switcher.  
Table 2-1. Panel Delegation  
Conditions and  
Comments  
Subanel  
Button Pressed  
Delegated Subpanel  
Transition  
KEY 1 or KEY 2  
Keyer, Key Bus  
(same M/E)  
Mask  
INHibit MASK or  
FORCE MASK must be  
on  
Chroma Keyer  
CHR KEY must be on  
Transition  
BKGD B or BKGD A  
Keyer (same M/E)  
(Layered Mode)  
Transition  
WIPE  
Wipe  
AUX/Mask/PVW  
Bus  
Any PREVIEW ONLY  
Crosspoint  
Preview Bus  
Keyer  
KEY 1 or KEY 2  
Key Bus (same M/E)  
Mask  
INHibit MASK or  
FORCE MASK must be  
on  
Chroma Keyer  
CHR KEY must be on  
2-8  
         
Auto Delegation  
Table 2-1. Panel Delegation - (continued)  
Conditions and  
Comments  
Subanel  
Button Pressed  
Delegated Subpanel  
Keyer  
PRI PST PTTN or SEC  
PST PTTN  
Wipe  
Keyer  
Keyer  
CHR KEY  
Chroma Keyer  
Mask  
INHibit MASK or  
FORCE MASK  
INHibit MASK or  
FORCE MASK button  
must be turned on by the  
press  
Keyer  
Keyer  
Matte  
Any Borderline mode  
button except NORMal  
Matte (same M/E)  
Matte (same M/E)  
Wipe Matte*  
Lights K1 BORD or K2  
BORD indicator in matte  
subpanel, depending on  
Keyer delegation  
MATTE FILL  
Lights K1 FILL or K2  
FILL indicator on Matte  
subpanel, depending on  
keyer delegation  
PRI WIPE WASH or  
SEC WIPE WASH  
If Wipe BORDER is on  
E-MEM  
Mask  
Register Recall  
Keyer and Key Bus  
Wipe  
PRI WIPE or SEC  
WIPE  
Wipe  
BORDER  
Matte (same M/E)  
BORDer button must be  
turned on by the press  
Lights PRI WIPE or SEC  
WIPE indicator on matte  
subpanel  
*In an M/E Matte Subpanel: Pressing the PRI WIPE WASH button causes the Wipe Subpanel to be  
auto delegated to the primary wipe pattern generator for the calling M/E. Pressing the SEC WIPE  
WASH button in the M/E Matte Subpanel causes the Wipe Subpanel to be auto delegated to the  
secondary wipe pattern generator for the calling M/E.  
2-9  
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Menu Delegation (DPOPs)  
The Model 2200 also delegates some menus on the Menu Display  
screen to open when specific buttons on the panel are double-  
pressed. (The second press must occur within a half a second)  
Table 2-2 lists the buttons that support this function.  
NOTE: An opened menu is delegated, where appropriate, to the button  
that opened the menu. For example, double-pressing the KEY 1 delegation  
button on the M/E 1 Keyer panel causes the keyer menu to open and the  
menu controls to be delegated to keyer 1 of M/E 1.  
Table 2-2. Menu Delegation  
Subpanel  
Button Double-Pressed  
Delegated Menu  
Transition  
WIPE  
Wipe Pattern menu  
Keyer menu  
Keyer (any M/E)  
KEY 1 and KEY 2  
Keyer (any M/E)  
(Layered Mode)  
BKGD B, BKGD A, KEY 1, and  
KEY 2  
Keyer menu  
Keyer (any M/E)  
PRI PST PTTN or SEC PST  
PTTN  
Wipe menu  
CHR KEY  
Chroma Key menu  
Chroma Key menu  
Chroma Keyer  
Frame Store  
M/E 1 KEY 1 through  
M/E 2 KEY-2 on 3000-2 or  
through M/E 3 KEY 3 on 3000-3  
VIDEO STORE, or KEY STORE  
Frame Store menu  
2-10  
     
Auto Delegation  
Table 2-2. Menu Delegation - (continued)  
Subpanel  
Button Double-Pressed  
Delegated Menu  
Wipe  
Wipe Pattern MENU  
Wipe Pattern menu  
Wipe Modifiers menu  
M/E 1 PRI through M/E 2 SEC  
on 3000-2 or through M/E 3 SEC  
on 3000-3  
Wipe PatternTEXTURE  
Wipe Texture menu  
Crosspoint Source  
Select  
SHIFT  
User Preference  
menu  
Mask  
INH MASK or MASK BUS  
Mask menu  
2-11  
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Transition Subpanels  
The transition subpanels are used to select the type of transition  
and to execute the transition. There is a transition subpanel for  
each M/ E. (See Figures 2-3 and 2-4.)  
Transition  
Effect  
Effect  
Effect  
Key  
Key  
Key  
Bkgd  
Bkgd  
Priority  
1
2
B
A
On  
On  
On  
On  
Layered  
Over  
Over  
Preset  
Black  
Wipe  
Mix  
Auto  
Tran  
Cut  
60  
Figure 2-3. M/E 1 Transition Subpanel  
Transition  
Effect  
Effect  
Effect  
Key  
Key  
Priority  
Bkgd  
Bkgd  
Key  
2
B
A
1
On  
On  
On  
On  
Layered  
Over  
Over  
Preset  
Black  
Wipe  
Mix  
Auto  
Tran  
Cut  
60  
Figure 2-4. M/E 2 Transition Subpanel  
2-12  
         
Transition Subpanels  
Next Transition Buttons  
The five next transition buttons – BKGD b, BKGD a, KEY 1, KEY 2,  
and KEY PRIORity – select the output signals that will change  
during the next transition.  
An ON indicator located beneath each next transition button is lit  
when the associated signal is an active part of the M/ E output in  
layered mode.  
On  
NOTE: The way the Next Transition buttons operate depends on  
whether the M/E is operating in Standard Mode or in Layered Mode. The  
mode of operation is set in the M/E MODE menu, described in section 3.  
Next Transition Buttons (Standard Mode)  
In Standard Mode, only the BKGD A, KEY 1, KEY 2, and KEY  
PRIORity next transition buttons and the ON and OVER indicators  
below the KEY buttons are functional. (The BKGD B button and  
the ON indicators below the BKGD buttons are not functional and  
the LAYERED indicator is not lit.)  
The transition can affect Background only, Key 1 only, Key 2 only,  
or any combination of those. Multiple-layer transitions are  
selected by simultaneously pressing more than one button.  
Pressing BKGD A selects background video to change during the  
next transition. That is, the background video output of the M/ E  
will change from the source selected on the A Background bus to  
the source selected on the B Background bus.  
Bkgd  
A
At the end of the transition, the inputs selected on the back-  
ground buses will interchange, or “flip-flop.” The “new video” on  
the B Background bus will transfer to the A Back-ground bus, and  
the “old video” on the A Background bus will transfer to the B  
Background bus.  
2-13  
         
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Activating the KEY 1 or KEY 2 button (lamp lit) causes the next  
transition to bring on or remove the selected key. Selecting KEY 1  
or KEY 2 delegates the keyers subpanel and KEY bus to the  
selected keyer so that the characteristics of the selected key may be  
adjusted (see keyer subpanel description).  
Key  
1
Key  
2
One or both of the KEY buttons can be activated at the same time  
and one or both keys can be on (ON indicator lit) at the same time.  
Pressing KEY PRIORity causes the next transition to swap the Key  
1/ Key 2 priority. This can be performed as a mix, wipe, or cut  
transition. Key priority always involves both Key 1 and Key 2  
Key  
Priority  
The OVER indicators lights when that key is over the other key.  
Over  
The effect indicators light when the associated key or video is in  
the effects send mode.  
Effect  
Next Transition Buttons (Layered Mode)  
In Layered Mode, all of the next transition buttons and indicators  
are functional and the LAYERED indicator is lit. In this mode,  
BKGD B and BKGD A are keyers.  
Layered  
The transition can affect Background A only, Background B only,  
Key 1 only, Key 2 only, or any combination of these. Multiple-  
layer transitions can be selected by simultaneously pressing more  
than one button.  
NOTE: Flip-flop operation occurs only when operating in Standard  
mode. Operating in layered mode causes the A and B Background layers  
to transition in a manner similar to the Key 1 and Key 2 layers (see the  
descriptions for Key 1 and Key 2).  
In Layered mode, the BKGD A and BKGD B buttons also delegate  
the keyers subpanel. (The key bus delegation remains unchanged  
when the keyer subpanel is delegated to either of the background  
layers.)  
Bkgd  
A
Bkgd  
B
2-14  
         
Transition Subpanels  
Transition Type Buttons  
The type of transition at the next transition is determined by the  
WIPE, MIX, and PRESET BLACK buttons.  
The WIPE and MIX buttons are mutually exclusive; pressing one  
selects it and de-selects the other.  
A WIPE transition uses the output of the wipe generator to shape  
the selected transition(s). Your selected wipe pattern appears over  
the old video/ key and moves across the screen, revealing the new  
video/ key as it moves. Use either the lever arm or the AUTOTRANs  
button to perform the WIPE transition.  
Wipe  
Mix  
Pressing MIX selects a transition that mixes video, keys or  
backgrounds, during the change from one source to the other. A  
mix transition gradually fades the new video and/ or key over the  
old video and/ or key. You can use either the lever arm or AUTO  
TRANs button to perform a MIX transition.  
Pressing the PRESET BLACK button selects a two-stage transition  
that inserts black between the two video sources being mixed,  
wiped, or cut. For example, instead of mixing directly between the  
A Background and B Background buses during a background  
transition, a preset black transition mixes, wipes, or cuts from the  
A Background bus to black. When a second transition is  
performed, black mixes, wipes, or cuts, away to the B  
Background. After completion of the two transitions, PRESET  
BLACK turns itself off automatically.  
Preset  
Black  
In addition to this automatic cancellation, you can toggle PRESET  
BLACK on and off manually. If you turn off PRESET BLACK while  
the transition is on the black limit, the M/ E output will  
immediately switch from black to the original signal. If you turn  
off PRESET BLACK when it is off limit, the transition to or from  
black will stop.  
2-15  
         
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
The PRESET BLACK function is available in each M/ E. PRESET  
BLACK affects only the effect where it is selected and not the entire  
switcher. The button lights when pressed and turns off  
automatically when the second transition is complete. The BLACK  
video input button on the A Bus remains lit while the M/ E is on  
the black limit. The preview monitor continues to show the final  
result of the two-stage preset black transition.  
MIX and WIPE are unaffected when PRESET BLACK is turned on.  
MIX and WIPE can be changed at any time during a preset black  
operation.  
Preset Black always fades to a full screen black regardless of  
whether the switcher is operating in layered mode or standard  
mode.  
An abort of Preset Black occurs when the operator selects a  
crosspoint on the A Background bus while the M/ E transition is  
on the black limit. This abort causes the following to occur: the  
preset black transition is cancelled, the PRESET BLACK button  
lamp turns off, all keys are dropped, and the selected crosspoint is  
taken fully on-air. If the abort occurs in Layered Mode, the M/ E is  
forced to Standard Mode to ensure that the selected crosspoint is  
a full raster image.  
A new background source may be selected on the B Background  
bus when you are at the midpoint of a preset black mix. In the  
same manner, next-transition delegation buttons, keyer modes, or  
keyer sources may also be changed. None of these changes will  
abort the preset black transition.  
2-16  
Transition Subpanels  
Configuring the BLACK Crosspoint – When mapping inputs to  
pushbuttons, one of the choices in the CONFG menu is BLACK, and  
another choice is NONE. Your selection will have an effect on how  
PRESET BLACK operates, and what will happen in the event the  
controller CPU fails.  
Black  
When the first transition during a preset black operation is  
completed, the left most BLACK crosspoint is automatically  
selected on the A Background bus. If black has not been assigned  
to any pushbutton, the PRESET BLACK button is disabled and the  
preset black function is not permitted. If a pushbutton is assigned  
to NONE, black appears when that button is selected; however the  
preset black function will not use this as the BLACK crosspoint.  
Processor Failure – The BLACK crosspoint is also important in the  
situation where the Controller main CPU fails while one of the  
M/ Es is performing a re-entry. When it fails, the M/ Es are  
required to abandon their re-entry crosspoints and select BLACK  
on the same bus. In the case where black was never assigned to a  
pushbutton, the M/ E selects the left most crosspoint on the bus.  
Transition Controls  
You can perform a transition using any of three different controls:  
the lever arm, the AUTO TRANs button, or the CUT button.  
Auto  
Trans  
Cut  
The lever arm is used to perform manual transitions. Moving  
the lever arm from one limit to the other always performs a  
complete transition.  
Using the lever arm, it is possible to start a transition, stop it at  
any point, reverse it, and even return to the original limit,  
without completing the transition. The arrows at the top and  
bottom of the lever arm travel lights to indicate the direction  
that the lever arm has to move to complete the transition.  
2-17  
         
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
You can use the lever arm in combination with the AUTO  
TRANs button to perform a transition. You can start the  
transition by moving the lever arm off its limit, and finish the  
transition by pressing AUTO TRANs. The transition is  
completed at a rate proportional to the rate set for a full AUTO  
TRANs transition. For example, if the lever arm is moved  
halfway and the transition is completed by pressing AUTO  
TRANs at a rate of 200 frames, the remaining half of the  
transition will take 100 frames.  
NOTE: The lever arm will be left off-limit any time you begin a  
transition with the lever arm and finish it with AUTOTRANs. The lever  
arm will not function properly again until is moved to either limit (this  
action will not change the M/E output). While the lever arm is non-  
functional, both lever arm direction indicators are on.  
2-18  
Transition Subpanels  
Pressing CUT cannot, however, complete a transition begun with  
the lever arm. In this case, CUT reverses the inputs during the  
background transitions. During key transitions, it changes the  
logic state of the key.  
E-MEM recall operations result in another set of conditions for  
lever arm transitions. When an E-MEM recall places a transition at  
a point different from the actual position of the lever arm, the lever  
arm becomes inactive until it is moved to catch up with the  
transition. For example, assume the lever arm is on a limit and an  
E-MEM recall puts the transition at some midpoint. In such a case,  
the lever arm would be inoperative until you moved it far enough  
to catch up with the transition. At that point, you could use the  
lever arm to complete the transition or return it to the beginning  
limit. (Or, you could press AUTO TRANs to complete the  
transition). Another example of use with E-MEM is a case where  
the lever arm is off limit and an E-MEM recall puts the transition  
on a limit. In this instance, both lever direction lights would be lit,  
indicating the lever arm is inoperative. Moving the lever arm to  
either limit will turn the direction lights off and reactivate the  
lever arm. (You could also use AUTO TRANs to resume the  
transition since auto transitions continue to function even when  
the lever arm is inoperative.)  
Pressing the AUTO TRANs button starts an automatic S-  
linear transition at the rate displayed on the LEDs next to  
the button.  
Auto  
Trans  
060  
2-19  
 
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
You can specify a transition rate by entering a value from Ø to 999  
frames on the numeric keypad in the effects memory subpanel. A  
zero frame transition is equivalent to a cut. (Refer to the effects  
memory subpanel description later in this section for further  
information on setting the rate.) The lamp in the AUTO TRANs  
button remains lit for the duration of the transition.  
Pressing AUTOTRANs a second time during a transition, stops the  
transition at the current point. The transition can be completed by  
pressing the button a third time or by moving the lever arm to its  
opposite limit. The lever arm becomes active when it catches up  
with the auto transition in progress. Pressing the CUT button  
leaves the transition where it stopped but reverses the two videos  
or the logic state of a key. Similarly, you can start a transition by  
using the lever arm and complete it by pressing the AUTO TRANs  
button. However, performing a transition in such a manner leaves  
the lever arm off limit.  
Pressing the CUT button causes an immediate transition. The M/ E  
Cut  
output changes instantaneously.  
2-20  
 
Keyer Areas  
The keyer areas are used to set up the keyers. There is one keyer  
subpanel for each M/ E each of these can be delegated to each of  
the keyers in that M/ E. (See Figure 2-5.) The keyer areas provide  
control over the following features for its M/ E:  
Key masking  
Video key type selection — preset pattern, chroma key,  
luminance key, or linear key.  
Key fill: matte or video fill  
Keyer  
Shadow  
Extrude  
Invert  
Outline  
Normal  
Border  
Borderline  
Size/Position  
Show  
Key  
Inhibit  
Mask  
Force  
Mask  
Key  
Over  
Split  
Key  
Video  
Fill  
Matte  
Fill  
Video  
Key  
Auto  
Select  
Key  
Borderline  
Opacity  
Lum  
Key  
Linear  
Key  
Chroma  
Key  
Pri  
Preset  
Pattern  
Sec  
Preset  
Pattern  
Gain  
Clip  
Bkgd  
Bkgd  
Key  
On  
Key  
Key  
B
A
2
1
Figure 2-5. Keyers Subpanel  
Key source: video key or auto-selection of key signals based  
on user preferences Show key  
Borderline settings  
Key invert  
Key priority  
Clip and Gain  
2-21  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Keyer Delegation Buttons  
The keyer delegation buttons select which of the keyers is being  
changed. In normal mode, the Keyer Subpanel, located in each  
M/ E row, can be delegated between Key 1 and Key 2.  
Key  
1
Key  
2
In layered mode, four keyers are available –  
Key 1, Key 2, Background B, and Background  
A.  
Bkgd  
A
Key  
1
Key  
1
Bkgd  
B
KEY ON Indicator  
The key oN indicator lamp lights when the delegated keyer is in  
use. This indicator is a logical AND of the ON indicator in the  
transition subpanel and the keyer delegation selection.  
Key  
On  
Key Type Buttons  
The second row of buttons from the  
bottom of each keyer subpanel selects  
one of five keyer modes.  
Pri  
Preset  
Pattern  
Sec  
Preset  
Pattern  
Chroma  
Lum  
Key  
Key  
Linear  
Key  
Pressing the LINEAR KEY button selects a linear key with a gain  
fixed at unity, clip fixed at 50%, and no S-shaping. The LINEAR  
KEY button lamp (only) is illuminated when linear key is selected  
on the delegated keyer.  
Linear  
Key  
If a linear key is desired, but the key signal is not at the correct  
level, adjustments can be made with the (CLIP) and (GAIN) knobs.  
(CLIP) adjusts the offset of the key signal (over a small range) in  
linear key mode. (GAIN) adjusts the amplitude of the key signal  
(over a small range).  
Clip  
Gain  
2-22  
                     
Keyer Areas  
If either knob is adjusted away from unity, the LUM KEY button  
lights in addition to the LINear KEY button lamp. Both buttons  
illuminated indicates to the operator that a linear key is being  
performed with non-unity gain and/ or clip. If the key memory  
feature is enabled in a software menu, the non-unity setting is  
recalled whenever the input associated with this setting is  
selected.  
When gain and clip are returned to unity, the LUM KEY button  
lamp goes off. Since it is difficult to adjust the knobs back to exact  
unity, the unity values can be forced by pressing the LIN KEY  
button a second time while it is lit. This action restores unity and  
turns off the LUM KEY button lamp.  
The LUM KEY button selects a luminance key that has variable clip  
and gain adjustment and S-shaping of the key signal. Key (CLIP)  
(offset) and (GAIN) (amplitude) settings are remembered for each  
source. Six Clip and Gain values are saved: three for the video key  
and three for the Auto Select button (LUM, CHROMA KEY, and  
LINEAR).  
Lum  
Key  
A menu selection is available that switches a chroma trap into the  
key path to remove unwanted chroma from video used for  
keying.  
Pressing the CHROMA KEY button delegates the chroma keyer  
subpanel to that M/ E. (The CHROMA KEY button is functional  
only when the chroma keyer option is installed.) Refer to the  
chroma keyer subpanel description later in this section for details  
on chroma keyer operation. CHROMA KEY does not function with  
background keyers (layered mode).  
Chroma  
Key  
Pressing the Primary Preset Pattern PRI PRESET PATTERN button  
selects the output of the primary (transition) wipe generator as the  
key source. Pattern adjustment is done in the wipe subpanel (see  
the wipe subpanel description later in this section for details). The  
key (CLIP) and (GAIN) knobs are non-functional when this mode is  
selected.  
Pri  
Preset  
Pattern  
2-23  
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
In the signal path through the Model 2200 switcher, keys,  
including preset patterns, occur before the effect send crosspoints.  
This allows any key, including a preset pattern, to be sent to an  
external digital video effects device via an effects send. Transition  
wipes, however, occur after the effects send crosspoints.  
After pressing the PRI PST PTTN function the SPLIT KEY indicator  
is turned off.  
NOTE: Double-pressing the PRI PST PTTN or SEC PST PTTN button in  
the keyer subpanel opens up a menu that allows you to set the preset  
pattern wipe direction. A single press of either the PRI PST PTTN or the  
SEC PST PTTN button auto delegates the wipe subpanel.  
Sec  
Preset  
Pattern  
Pressing the SEC PRESET PATTERN (Secondary Preset Pattern)  
button selects the optional secondary wipe generator as the key  
source. Operation of the keyer while SEC PRESET PATTERN is  
selected is similar to that when PRI PRESET PATTERN is selected.  
The secondary wipe generator option provides wipe pattern  
selection independent of the primary wipe generator. When the  
secondary wipe option is not installed, only the secondary preset  
pattern edge attributes are independent (preset size, softness, soft  
symmetry, border width, border matte, border opacity, and  
normal/ reverse).  
All pattern controls are present on the wipe subpanel and wipe  
menus. Refer to the wipe subpanel description, later in this  
section, for a discussion of these controls.  
Primary and Secondary Preset Patterns can be used with all  
keyers in layered mode.  
The VIDEO FILL and MATTE FILL buttons determine whether the  
key is filled with key bus video or a locally generated matte. These  
buttons are mutually exclusive, one of the two buttons is always  
active and illuminated.  
Matte  
Fill  
Video  
Fill  
VIDEO FILL and MATTE FILL operate independently from the key  
source buttons. All keyer modes except the A and B keyers  
operate with either video or matte fill.  
2-24  
 
Keyer Areas  
When the key bus is contributing to the switcher Program output,  
pressing MATTE FILL does not low tally the key bus, even though  
the key fill video is not visible.  
Video fill mode operates with background keyers in layered  
mode. When the keyer is delegated to a background layer, the  
VIDEO FILL button is turned on automatically (MATTE FILL is  
turned off).  
Key Source Buttons  
The VIDEO KEY and AUTO SELECT KEY buttons determine the  
source of the key.  
Auto  
Select  
Key  
Video  
Key  
Pressing the VIDEO KEY button forces derivation of the key from a  
video source. The “video source” is the video selected on the key  
bus (for keyers 1 and 2) or on the background bus (for background  
keyers in layered mode only).  
If VIDEO KEY and VIDEO FILL are both selected, the result is a self-  
key.  
Pressing VIDEO KEY while in Chroma Key mode causes an  
encoded chroma key, using the fill video as the source for the  
encoded chroma keyer.  
Pressing the AUTO SEL KEY button forces the key to be derived  
from a user-defined source.  
Auto  
Select  
Key  
User preferences selected in the Configuration/ User Preferences  
menu determine whether a luminance or linear key is a self-key or  
an external key (and determine which external key is used). They  
also specify whether chroma keys are encoded or analog  
component (YUV, BETA, MII, or RGB).  
2-25  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Split Key Operation  
A Split Key uses any key source other than a key derived from the  
key fill (self key) or a key source pre-selected in user preferences  
or a preset pattern. All other key sources can be used in a Split  
Key. A Split Key can be used in all keyers, and in either standard  
or layered mode.  
A Split Key is set up by first selecting the key fill source on the Key  
bus, then holding down the VIDEO KEY button or the AUTO  
SELECT button while pressing a second button on the key bus.  
The second source provides the key signal. For AUTO SELECT that  
key is the external key signal mapped to that column of crosspoint  
buttons; for VIDEO KEY the key is the video signal mapped to that  
column of crosspoints. Pressing a lit video key or Auto Select Key  
button will illuminate the key source crosspoint.  
When a split key is operational with an auto select key or a video  
key, the SPLIT KEY indicator is lit.  
Split  
Key  
Other Key Modifier Buttons  
Pressing KEY OVER swaps the priority of the two keyers, KEY 1  
Key  
Over  
and KEY 2.The KEY OVER button lights when the keyer subpanel  
is delegated to the key that is over the other. It may be pressed  
whether or not either keyer is on-air.  
In Layered mode, the KEY OVER button does not light if the keyer  
subpanel is delegated to either background keyer, but the button  
still controls the priority of Keyers 1 and 2. It does not affect the  
priority of the background keyers, which have a fixed priority of  
background A over background B.  
2-26  
         
Keyer Areas  
One of the two key OVER indicators on the associated transition  
subpanel is always on, indicating the priority of the Keyers 1 and  
2. The indicator is on regardless of the on-air status of either keyer.  
Over  
The INVert toggle button inverts the polarity of the key source.  
Inversion is applied to the incoming key source before key  
processing is applied. INVert operates in all keyers in layered  
mode.  
Invert  
The SHOW KEY button is used for viewing the key signal on a  
particular keyer. This button does not affect the on-air video.  
When held down, the switched preview bus output shows the key  
signal from the keyer currently delegated to the keyer subpanel.  
The key signal displayed is the key after clipping, masking, and  
chroma trapping have taken place.  
Show  
Key  
The SHOW KEY button does not affect the program output of the  
M/ E and operates in all keyers in layered mode.  
Borderline Controls  
The buttons at the top of the keyer  
subpanel control the Borderline option.  
The NORMal, BORDer, SHadow, EXtrude,  
and OUTLINE buttons are  
Normal  
Border  
Shadow  
Extrude Outline  
interlocked; only one button can be active at a time.  
NOTE: The background keyers (layered mode) do not have Borderline  
capability.  
Border, Shadow, and Extrude modes operate with video or matte  
filled keys. The Borderline matte is separate from the fill matte  
and has its own delegate button in the matte subpanel.  
The Borderline matte is adjusted in the matte subpanel after  
selecting K1 BORD or k2 BORD, as appropriate, with the MATTE  
SELect delegation button.  
Normal  
The NORMal button turns Borderline off.  
2-27  
           
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
The BORDer button turns on symmetrical Borderline mode. The  
border width may be one, two, or three video lines wide, as  
Border  
adjusted by the (borderline SIZE/POSition) control.  
The SHadow button turns on Shadow mode. The (borderline  
SIZE/POSition) knob is used to adjust the shadow width and  
position from one-to-six lines down and to the right or left.  
Shadow  
The EXtrude button operates like SHadow except that the shape of  
the shadow is different. The (borderline SIZE/POSition) knob is  
used to adjust the shadow width and position from one-to-six  
lines down and to the right or left.  
Extrude  
Outline  
Pressing the OUTLINE button produces an outline of the key  
signal. The border width is adjustable to one, two, or three lines  
with the (Borderline SIZE/POSition) knob. In Outline mode, there  
is no fill video or fill matte; only the background video and outline  
border matte are output. As a result, the VIDEO FILL and MATTE  
FILL buttons have no effect when OUTLINE is active.  
The Borderline (Borderline SIZE/POSition) knob adjusts the width  
of all Borderline borders. The control also moves the shadow or  
extruded shadow either down to the left or down to the right.  
Borderline  
Size/Position  
The Borderline (Borderline OPACITY) knob adjusts the  
transparency of the Borderline borders.  
Borderline  
Opacity  
2-28  
           
Keyer Areas  
Auto Preview Operation  
In normal operation, the switched preview output of the system  
may be set to monitor any of the M/ E preview outputs, preview  
output, or preview primary bus.  
The Auto Preview feature is activated by pressing one of the keyer  
delegate buttons (KEY 1, KEY 2, BKGD B, or BKGD A) for 1/ 2  
second or longer. When Auto Preview is active, the delegated key  
is inserted over the M/ E preview output so that you may preview  
the key setup on the switched preview bus.  
Holding down a keyer delegate button or turning the (CLIP)  
and/ or (GAIN) controls prolongs the Auto Preview mode. The  
preview returns to normal after the delegate button is no longer  
held down and there is no activity on the (CLIP) or (GAIN) controls  
for a user-defined period of time. (User preferences are described  
in Section 2 of this manual.)  
Mask Control  
Pressing inhibit MASK inhibits the key from being displayed  
wherever the mask is present. Pressing FORCE MASK causes the  
key to be fully turned on where the mask is present, rather than  
suppressing the key. (Normally, the mask generator is used to  
define areas of the screen where the key is inhibited.) FORCE  
MASK is not intended for use with shaped video.  
Force  
Mask  
Inhibit  
Mask  
The INHibit MASK and FORCE MASK toggle buttons are  
illuminated when turned on, and can be turned on individually or  
together.  
When either button is pressed, the masks subpanel is  
automatically delegated for adjusting the correct mask, if auto  
delegation is enabled.  
The INHibit MASK and FORCE MASK buttons are inoperative for  
preset pattern keys. The background keyers (layered mode) do  
not have mask capabilities and the mask buttons are inoperative  
when the subpanel is delegated to a background keyer.  
2-29  
                 
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Chroma Keyer Subpanel  
The basic Chroma Keyer option consists of a Chroma Key Carrier  
Module for each M/ E, providing two chroma keyers per M/ E.  
With this option installed, a chroma key may be done using any  
4:2:2 crosspoint signal on the M/ E key bus as a source. For  
external component video sources, an optional dual Chroma Key  
Input Module can be added, this provides two component video  
sources.  
With a Chroma Keyer option installed in one or both M/ Es, the  
information contained in a video picture. User control of chroma  
keying is provided by the chroma keyers subpanel (Figure 2-6)  
and the (CLIP) and (GAIN) controls on the keyer subpanel.  
In addition to the controls provided on the chroma keyers  
subpanel, several chroma keyer controls are provided via the  
menu display. These are described here and in the menu  
descriptions under Chroma Key Menu on page 3-65  
Chroma Keyer  
R
M
B
Y
G
C
Shadow  
On  
Shadow  
Opacity  
Selectivity  
Lum  
Auto  
Setup  
Bkgd  
Supr  
Chroma  
M/E 1  
Key 1  
M/E 1  
Key 2  
M/E 2  
Key 1  
M/E 2  
Key 2  
Figure 2-6. Chroma Keyers Subpanel  
2-30  
       
Chroma Keyer Subpanel  
Chroma Keyer Delegation  
The chroma keyers subpanel may be delegated  
between any of the chroma keyers (two per M/ E)  
using the four buttons located at the bottom of  
the subpanel.  
M/E 1  
Key 1  
M/E 2  
Key 2  
M/E 1  
Key 2  
M/E 2  
Key 1  
Chroma Keyer Controls  
The HUE control sets the color in the chroma key scene from  
which the key signal will be derived. The foreground and  
background suppress mattes also use this color unless  
otherwise set in the menu. The six indicators near the (HUE)  
knob indicate the color the knob is currently set to (R=red;  
M=magenta; B=blue; C=cyan; G=green; Y=yellow).  
R
M
B
Y
G
C
(SELECTIVITY) is used to set the how wide a band of colors are  
used to make the key signal.  
Selectivity  
The Shadow ON button turns the chroma key shadow on or off.  
Shadow  
On  
The (SHADOW OPACITY) control sets the opacity of the chroma key  
shadow.  
Shadow  
Opacity  
2-31  
               
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Background suppression removes traces of the chroma key  
Bkgd  
Supr  
background color from the foreground. The BKGD SUPR button  
turns background suppression on or off. When suppression is  
turned on, the associated control knobs are used to define the  
amount of suppression.  
The BKGD SUPR (LUM) control adjusts the amount of luminance  
subtracted from the background region of the foreground video.  
Lum  
The BKGD SUPR (CHROMA) control adjusts the amount of  
chrominance subtracted from the background region of the  
foreground video. This knob will beep when the chroma has been  
suppressed to zero (at a linear chroma key location).  
Chroma  
The CLIP knob in the keyers subpanel also will indicate when the  
chroma key has reached a linear level. In terms of the chroma key  
this indicates that the foreground part of the scene is just opaque.  
Only readjust this setting when parts of the foreground are  
transparent where they are picking up background color.  
The Auto Setup button causes the switcher to automatically set up  
the chroma keyer. To do this press the Auto Setup button. This  
causes the chroma keyer to take over the wipe positioner knob  
and puts a cross hair on the chroma key layer of the output. Use  
the positioner to place the cross hair on the background you wish  
to key on and press the Auto Setup key again.  
Auto  
Setup  
2-32  
         
Matte Generators  
Matte Generators  
The matte generator areas (Figure 2-7) provide controls for  
creating and modifying mattes. There is one matte generator  
subpanel for each M/ E, each of these areas controls the six mattes  
on that M/ E.  
Matte  
Pri  
Wipe  
Wash  
Sec  
Wipe  
Wash  
Hue/  
Softness  
Matte 2  
Flat  
Matte  
K1 Fill  
K2 Fill  
K1 Border  
K2 Border  
Sec Wipe  
Saturation/  
Offset  
Pri Wipe  
Matte  
Select  
Brightness  
Figure 2-7. Matte Subpanel  
2-33  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Matte Delegation  
Each matte subpanel has a MATTE SELect button used to select  
Matte  
Select  
which of the six matte generators that particular subpanel will  
control. Above the MATTE SELECT button are six indicators,  
which illuminate to show the current delegation at any given  
time. Pressing the MATTE SELLECT button repeatedly cycles the  
selection through all six matte generators. Holding the button  
down causes it to cycle through the selections automatically until  
the button is released. If the Borderline option is not installed in  
Key 1 or Key 2, the K1 BORD and/ or K2 BORD selections will be  
skipped.  
MATTE SELECT Indicators  
The six indicator LEDs indicate delegation as follows:  
K1 FILL and K2 FILL LEDs – Indicate that the matte subpanel is  
delegated to one of the matte generators for a subpanel  
determined by the key hole cutter. However, when the keyer is in  
Video Fill mode, the matte is not visible. Matte fill is available  
with all key types (LIN, LUM, CHR, PST PTTN).  
K1 Fill  
K2 Fill  
K1 Border  
K2 Border  
Pri Wipe  
Sec Wipe  
K1 BORDer and K2 BORDer LEDs – Indicate that the matte  
subpanel is delegated to a matte generator for adjusting the  
characteristics of the key border matte in all Borderline modes.  
(See the Keyer Subpanel description for related keyer buttons  
BORDer, SHDW, EXTRUDE, and OUTLINE.)  
PRI WIPE LED – Indicates delegation of the matte generator for  
controlling the transition wipe border matte. The PRI WIPE LED  
also indicates that the M/ E matte subpanel is delegated to create  
the primary preset pattern border in preset pattern mode. (See the  
PRI PST PTTN button description under the Keyer Subpanel  
topic.)  
SECWIPE LEDs – Indicates that the matte subpanel is delegated to  
create the secondary preset pattern border in preset pattern mode  
(see the SEC PST PTTN button description under the Keyer  
Subpanel topic).  
2-34  
                 
Matte Generators  
Matte Modifier Controls  
Four buttons and three control knobs in each matte subpanel  
control the characteristics of the delegated background matte.  
When a Matte Subpanel is delegated away from a matte generator  
the status of the knobs and buttons is remembered  
The FLAT MATTE button selects a non-wash matte for the  
delegated matte generator. Pressing this button deselects all other  
matte mode buttons (MATTE 2, PRI WIPE WASH, and SEC WIPE  
WASH on that matte.  
Flat  
Matte  
The MATTE 2 button delegates the matte controls to the second  
matte generator when a matte wash is selected. To select a matte  
wash, press either PRI WIPE WASH or SEC WIPE WASH on that  
matte.  
Matte 2  
PRIWIPEWASH selects the primary (Transition) wipe generator to  
modulate between the two mattes during a wash. Pressing and  
holding this button allows you to change the transition softness  
with the (HUE/SOFTNESS) knob and the offset (position) with the  
(SATURATION/OFFSET) knob.  
Pri  
Wipe  
Wash  
SEC WIPE WASH causes the secondary (optional) wipe generator  
to be used to modulate between the two mattes in a wash.  
Pressing and holding this button allows you to change the  
transition softness with the (HUE/SOFTNESS) knob and the offset  
(position) with the (SATURATION/OFFSET) knob.  
Sec  
Wipe  
Wash  
(HUE/SOFTNESS) knob – Adjusts the hue of the matte. The knob  
also adjusts the softness (gain) of the transition between the two  
matte generators when you hold down the PRIWIPEWASH or SEC  
WIPE WASH, button. Softness is not adjustable while FLAT MATTE  
is active.  
Hue/  
Softness  
(SATURATION/OFFSET) knob – Adjusts the color saturation of the  
matte. The knob adjusts the offset (position) of the wash  
modulation when you hold down the PRIWIPEWASH or SECWIPE  
WASH button. Offset is not adjustable while FLAT MATTE is active.  
Saturation/  
Offset  
Brightness  
(BRIGHTNESS) knob – Adjusts the color brightness of the matte.  
2-35  
                 
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Effects Memory Subpanel  
The Effects Memory (E-MEM®) Subpanel (Figure 2-8) allows you  
to define, store, and recall effects setups. The single, delegated E-  
MEM Subpanel contains enable buttons, a keypad with readout,  
effect editing buttons, effect run buttons, and a run lever arm.  
Stop  
Next  
KF  
Hold  
Input  
Reverse  
Rewind  
Run  
Run Control  
E-MEM  
Auto  
Recall  
Auto  
Run  
Clear  
Work  
Buffer  
Const  
Dur  
Prev  
Next  
1345804-42224438  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
Chan 1  
Chan 2  
Global  
Lock  
Cut  
Get  
Put  
Go To  
KF  
Go To  
Time  
Enable  
All  
+ / ---  
8
5
2
0
7
4
1
9
Learn  
Bank 0  
Bank 1  
Misc  
Bkgd  
Seq  
Copy  
Paste  
Mark  
KF  
Dur  
Effect  
Dur  
6
Effect  
Dis  
Timr  
Cursor  
Mark  
Cursor  
Insert  
Before  
3
Trim  
Camera  
Undo  
Modify  
Insert  
After  
Tran  
Rate  
Mark  
Block  
.
Enter  
Bank  
Enables  
Edit  
Figure 2-8. Effects Memory Subpanel  
2-36  
       
Effects Memory Subpanel  
E-MEM Registers  
Effect setups are stored in E-MEM registers. There is a total of 100  
registers, grouped in ten banks of ten registers. Each register  
belongs to a specific bank (0 through 9) and has a unique number  
(0 through 9) within that bank. For example, register 46 means  
bank 4, register 6.  
When the system is powered up, the keypad readout comes up  
with a “NO CURRENT REG” message.  
Effects and Keyframes  
An E-MEM “effect” has generally been considered to be whatever  
was stored in an E-MEM register. This consisted of the status of  
enabled levels of the switcher as set up on the control panel and in  
the menus, at the time the E-MEM effect was stored (“learned”).  
However, the Model 2200 Switcher is able to store more than one  
switcher state (“a keyframe”) on each enabled level in a single E-  
MEM register, and to transition, or “run,” between keyframes.  
Therefore, a keyframe effect is considered to be a sequence of  
keyframes stored in a single E-MEM register.  
You may think of an E-MEM effect as being the same as a  
keyframe effect, but consisting of a single keyframe on each  
enabled level. This mode of operation (single-keyframe effects)  
may still be used, and may be preferable to multiple-keyframe  
effects in many instances.  
Learning Effects  
To learn an effect setup into a register, press the following  
sequences of buttons in the E-MEM Subpanel:  
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be learned. For more  
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.  
2-37  
         
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
LeaRN, BANK, bank number, register number  
If the next desired register is in the current bank, you may press  
just the desired register number.  
If the desired bank is 0 or 1, you may substitute BANK 0 or BANK  
1 for BANK, bank number in the above sequences.  
Recalling Effects  
To recall a register, press the following buttons:  
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be recalled. For more  
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.  
BANK, bank number, register number  
When an E-MEM register is recalled, the key memory for any  
recalled crosspoint is updated.  
During an E-MEM recall, if you dont want the crosspoint to  
change, you can manually hold down the present crosspoint  
button while the E-MEM register is recalled. This is referred to as  
“crosspoint override,” and If key memory is off at this time, the  
video and key crosspoint are held. If key memory is on, the video  
and key crosspoint and the current keyer memory state are held.  
Crosspoint Override  
During an E-MEM recall, if you dont want the crosspoint on an  
individual bus to change, you can manually hold down the  
present crosspoint buttons while the E-MEM register is recalled.  
This is referred to as “crosspoint override.” When this is done, the  
video and key crosspoints are held, and if key memory is on at this  
time, the current keyer memory state is also held.  
See the HOLD INPUT button description, later in this section, for a  
method of holding all sources while E-MEM registers are recalled.  
2-38  
       
Effects Memory Subpanel  
Keypad with Readout  
The E-MEM keypad is used for effect recalls, and serves  
as a numerical entry pad for the following buttons:TRAN  
RATE, LeaRN, LeaRN SEQ, LOCK, BANK, GET, and PUT.  
(The last two of these buttons are located in the E-MEM  
effect editing group of buttons.)  
1345804-42224438  
Lock  
+ / ---  
8
5
2
0
7
4
1
9
Learn  
Bank 0  
Seq  
6
Pushing a numerical button at any time other than when  
preceded by one of the above buttons recalls the  
corresponding register within the current bank. To recall  
a register in a different bank, enter: BANK, bank number,  
register number  
Effect  
Dis  
Bank 1  
3
Trim  
Undo  
Tran  
Rate  
.
Enter  
Bank  
The alphanumeric readout at the top of the  
E-MEM keypad provides status information  
about E-MEM operations and registers.  
NO CURRENT REG  
During normal learn and recall operations, the current Bank and  
Register values are displayed. If the register is locked, there is an  
“L” shown at the left end of the display. Other messages on the E-  
MEM readout include “NO CURRENT REG” at bootup, “NO  
EMPTY REGS” if no register is available for a LeaRN• or PUT•  
operation, and “REG IS LOCKED” if you attempt to put an effect  
into a locked register. During gets and puts, the display provides  
prompts asking you for the source or destination register.  
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be recalled. For more  
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.  
It is possible to have two different enabled levels recalled by two  
different registers. In this case there are actually two current  
registers, but only one can be shown in the display. The existence  
of this condition is indicated by a “” between the apparent  
current bank number and the apparent current register number  
(for example, “B0REG 04”).  
2-39  
   
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
This condition occurs if (with AUTO ReCalL off) you enabled one  
level, recalled a register, turned off that enable, turned on another  
enable, recalled another register and re-enabled the first level. The  
locations of the contributing registers can be determined by  
turning on one enable at a time.  
/BANK is a two-function key that can be used for bank selection  
or for accessing “second” functions, that is, LOCK and UNDO.  
Pressing the /BANK button delegates the numeric keypad to  
single-digit bank selection, and delegates buttons with second  
functions to the second function.  
Bank  
The button lights when pressed, and stays lit until the delegation  
is completed. Pressing /BANK a second time also terminates the  
delegation.  
Refer to the “E-MEM Registers” description for use of the BANK  
button, and to the LOCK and UNDO headings for use of the ↑  
(second) function button.  
LeaRN is used for storing or “learning” the current panel setup in  
a register or for learning a register sequence.  
Lock  
Learn  
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be learned. For more  
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.  
LeaRN, BANK, bank number, register number  
If the next desired register is in the current bank, you may press  
just the desired register number.  
If the desired bank is 0 or 1, you may substitute BANK 0 or BANK  
1 for BANK, bank number in the above sequences.  
Refer to the SEQ button description for learning a register  
sequence.  
2-40  
   
Effects Memory Subpanel  
The LOCK function locks a single register. Locking a register  
prevents the contents of that register from being changed. To lock  
the current register, press the following buttons:  
Lock  
Learn  
Bank  
, LOCK  
When locked, an “L” is displayed at the left end of the  
register, press the buttons again:  
, LOCK  
NOTE: You cannot lock an entire E-MEM bank from the subpanel; a  
menu selection is provided for this action. See E-MEM Register Menu  
on page 3-83  
Pressing the BANK 0 button makes Bank 0 the current bank, and  
causes buttons 0 through 9 on the keypad to become one-button  
recall registers for registers 00 through 09. This button is lit  
whenever Bank 0 is the current bank.  
Bank 0  
Bank 1  
Pressing BANK 1 makes Bank 1 the current bank, and causes  
buttons 0 through 9 on the keypad to become one-button recall  
registers for registers 10 through 19. This button is lit whenever  
Bank 1 is the current bank.  
ENTER confirms a numerical entry on the keypad, such as for the  
following functions: GET, PUT, and TRAN RATE. The ENTER  
button lights when pressed.  
Trim  
Enter  
2-41  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
SEQ is used for creating automated register-recall sequences.  
Seq  
Create sequences with the following buttons and values  
(parameters in angle brackets (<...>) are optional):  
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be recalled. For more  
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.  
SEQ, LRN,  
register, <TRAN RATE>, <delay>,  
register, <TRAN RATE>, <delay>,  
..  
...  
LRN  
The command syntax is defined below.  
SEQ and LRN may be pressed in either order to start the  
command sequence.  
LRN must be pressed again to end the command sequence.  
<TRAN RATE> and <DELAY>, in angle brackets, are optional.  
(TRAN RATE) enables a user-defined delay to be introduced  
between register recalls.  
<DELAY> is a 1- to 3-digit number entered on the keypad that  
specifies an amount of delay in TV frames. (If the number  
entered is a 1- or 2-digit number, the entry must be terminated  
by pressing ENTER.  
REGISTER is any desired register number, as described  
previously (that is, BANK, BANK NUMBER, REGISTER NUMBER).  
Create a sequence loop by pressing the first register button as the  
last register in the sequence.  
2-42  
 
Effects Memory Subpanel  
Initiate sequences by pressing the following buttons:  
SEQ, register  
The sequence starts at the register indicated, and proceeds  
through the linked sequence to the last register. If a loop has been  
programmed, the sequence loop continues until the SEQ button is  
pressed to terminate the sequence.  
A sequence loop can be broken by double-pressing a register  
button, clearing the sequence link that existed in that register, and  
making the invoked register the last register in the sequence.  
During a sequence of registers with multiple levels, the SEQ  
button will high tally if any of the enabled levels was learned with  
a sequence. However, it may be that not all enabled levels are  
sequencing.  
Different sequence delays may be learned separately into  
different enabled levels. Sequence delays on different levels are  
completely independent, and thus the sequencing may be  
occurring at different times on different levels.  
If an E-MEM level is disabled while it is actively sequencing, the  
sequence will continue. Turning off the SEQ button will not halt  
the sequence, because the sequencing level is not delegated. To  
ensure halting all actively running sequences, all E-MEM levels  
must be enabled (ENABLe ALL) and then SEQ turned off.  
EFFect DIS causes an S-linear transition from the current state to  
the next recalled register. The current state may be a setup you  
have just done on the control panel or the state resulting from a  
register recall.  
Effect  
Dis  
An effects dissolve may be learned into a register, so that recalling  
that register will initiate a dissolve to another specified register.  
The following button sequence is used to learn a dissolve  
(parameters in angle brackets (<...>) are optional):  
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be learned. For more  
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.  
2-43  
 
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
LeaRN, EFFect DIS, <TRAN RATE, (eff dissolve rate>, (register)  
The command syntax is defined below.  
LEARN and EFFECT DIS may be pressed in either order to start  
the command sequence.  
TRAN RATE enables a user-defined effects dissolve rate to be  
introduced in the dissolve.  
<EFF DISSOLVE RATE> is a 1- to 3-digit number entered on the  
keypad that specifies the effects dissolve rate in number of TV  
frames. (If the number entered is a 1- or 2-digit number, the  
entry must be terminated by pressing ENTER).  
REGISTER is any desired register number, as described  
previously (that is, BANK, BANK NUMBER, REGISTER NUMBER).  
The effects dissolve rate is the same as the auto transition rate  
indicated in the readout on the corresponding Transition  
Subpanel.  
When the register with the learned effects dissolve is recalled, the  
EFFect DIS button will high tally until the dissolve is completed,  
then will turn off.  
During a recall of a register with multiple levels, the EFF DIS  
button will high tally if any of the enabled levels contains an  
effects dissolve. However, not all enabled levels may be  
dissolving.  
Different effects dissolve rates may be learned separately into  
different enabled levels. The effects dissolve rates on different  
levels are completely independent, and thus the dissolves may be  
running at different rates on different levels.  
2-44  
Effects Memory Subpanel  
The (DOT) button is used to represent the next empty register  
when used with LeaRN and PUT. (The next empty register is  
defined as the next register that is empty on all levels, not just  
enabled levels, starting with the current register. (At register 99,  
the search for an empty register will wrap around to 0).  
Undo  
LeaRN • learns the current switcher state into the next empty  
register, and that register becomes the current register.  
PUT • ENTER copies the current register into the next empty  
register. The current switcher state is unaffected and the  
current register number is unaffected.  
GET • ENTER clears out all levels of the current register. The  
current switcher state is unaffected and the current register  
number is unaffected.  
NOTE: If there are no empty registers, the operation will not be done,  
an error beep will sound, and the keypad readout shows “NO EMPTY  
REGS”  
UNDO is used to back out of a recall, LeaRN, PUT, GET, or another  
UNDO register operation. The UNDO button lights when pressed,  
confirming that it has been pressed. An UNDO must be done  
immediately after an undesired operation, otherwise it may not be  
able to undo the operation.  
Undo  
Bank  
For these register functions, pressing , UNDO repeatedly allows  
you to toggle back and forth between the two last states.  
(For toggling UNDO, you have to press /BANK then UNDO each  
time.)  
2-45  
   
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
TRAN RATE is used with the keypad to set the rate used by the  
AUTOTRANs (auto transition) button in the transition areas and by  
the EFFect DIS button on the E-MEM keypad.  
Tran  
Rate  
When TRAN RATE is pressed, the E-MEM display queries:  
SET WHICH RATE?  
and any Enable buttons that are on turn off.  
The transition rate is then delegated to the desired Transition  
Subpanel by pressing M/E 1 or M/E 2. Both of these functions may  
be enabled simultaneously by pressing ENABLe ALL.  
After enabling the desired levels, the display queries:  
AUTO RATE = ?  
Enter the desired rate using the numeric buttons on the keypad.  
Entering three digits on the keypad automatically enters the rate.  
If only one or two digits are entered, the entry must be completed  
by pressing ENTER. Rates from zero through 999 frames may be  
entered. If one or two digits have been entered, the entry may be  
cleared and the previous rate restored by pressing TRAN RATE  
again. As soon as the new rate is confirmed, it is displayed in the  
auto transition rate display in the delegated transition  
subpanel(s).  
When the transition rate has been set, the TRAN RATE button turns  
off and the Enable buttons return to their previous state, as does  
the keypad readout display.  
2-46  
 
Effects Memory Subpanel  
Enable Buttons  
The Enable buttons are located to the left of the keypad in the E-  
MEM Subpanel and are used for enabling register levels. Each  
register is partitioned into sections (or “levels”) corresponding to  
the Enable buttons.  
Auto  
Recall  
Auto  
Run  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
Chan 1  
Chan 2  
Global  
Enable  
All  
All register manipulation, including learn and recall operations,  
affect only the enabled levels. This allows you to build  
independent effects on each level and to recall the levels  
independently.  
Misc  
Bkgd  
For example, an effect using both M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 could be built  
with both being enabled, and either the M/ E 1 or M/ E 2 part of  
the effect could be recalled separately by enabling only one and  
recalling the register. Conversely, separate effects built at  
different times, in different levels of the same register, can be  
recalled together by enabling both M/ E 1 and M/ E 2.  
Camera  
Enables  
The ME 1 and M/E 2 buttons are also used when setting transition  
rates in the effects systems, as previously described (see TRAN  
RATE).  
M/E 1 and M/E 2 enable the following areas for learn and recall  
operations on a specific M/ E: standard or layered mode  
operation, crosspoint settings, transition settings, keyer settings,  
masks and mattes, chroma key settings, wipes, positioner settings  
and full additive mix (FAM) settings.  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
Bkgd  
BKGD enables the two background matte generator settings  
(BKGD 1 and BKGD 2 In the background subpanel) for learn and  
recall operations, excluding matte wash.  
2-47  
         
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
MISC enables the following user-defined areas for learn and recall  
Misc  
operations: frame store settings, peripheral settings, GPI settings,  
aux bus settings, mask bus settings, preview bus settings, and  
matte wash settings for Backgrounds 1 and 2. All aux buses  
default to the MISC level unless assigned to a DPM level using the  
Config/ DPM Map Ports and Config/ DPM Map Aux Buses  
menus.  
chan 1, chan 2, Global, and Camera enable parameters of the  
channel 1, channel 2, channel 3, and channel 4 DPMs (Digital  
Picture Manipulators) for learn and recall operations.  
Chan 1  
Chan 2  
Global  
Camera  
Pressing ENABLe ALL lights all Enable buttons if any or all of them  
are not presently lit, or turns all Enable buttons off if all are  
already lit. This action allows all enables to be turned off or on  
with a maximum of two button presses. ENABLe ALL may also be  
used to enable all levels simultaneously when setting transition  
rates (see the TRAN RATE button description).  
Enable  
All  
AUTO ReCalL allows the state of the Enable buttons to be learned  
or recalled as part of an effect.  
Auto  
Recall  
If AUTO ReCalL is on while an effect is learned, the state of the  
Enable buttons is learned as part of the effect. If AUTO ReCalL is off  
while an effect is learned, the enables are not learned, and any  
subsequent recall (even if AUTO ReCalL is on during the recall)  
does not change the state of the enables.  
If AUTO ReCalL is on during a recall, the enables (as learned) are  
first recalled, then the resulting enabled portions of the switcher  
are recalled. If AUTO ReCalL is off during a recall, the enables  
remain as set on the Enable panel, and those parts of the effect are  
recalled.  
AUTO RUN enables effect Recall-and-Run operations. When  
AUTO RUN is active, a register recall causes a recall of the  
register, sets the Time Cursor at Time 0, and causes an  
immediate run if the effect contains more than one  
keyframe.  
Auto  
Run  
2-48  
         
Effects Memory Subpanel  
Effect Editing Controls  
Clear  
Work  
Buffer  
Const  
Dur  
Prev  
Next  
The effect editing controls are located at the right side of the  
Effects Memory Subpanel.  
Cut  
Get  
Put  
Go To  
KF  
Go To  
Time  
Copy  
Paste  
Mark  
KF  
Dur  
Effect  
Dur  
Timr  
Cursor  
Mark  
Cursor  
Insert  
Before  
Modify  
Insert  
After  
Mark  
Block  
Edit  
CLEAR WORK BUFR is used to clear out stored values from the  
following switcher memory areas.  
Clear  
Work  
Buffer  
1. To Clear Current Working Buffer— except Keyers:  
Single press of the CLEAR WORK BUFR button: (E-MEM  
Subpanel)  
Clears Current Working Buffer (CWB) to user-defined  
defaults. The key memory portion of the CWB is unaffected  
(for example, video processing or clip and gain). All non-key  
memory parameters are cleared for enabled levels.  
2. To Clear Current Working Buffer — including Keyers:  
Double press of the CLEAR WORK BUFR button:  
Same as above, with addition of key memory parameters  
being cleared. Crosspoints are unaffected.  
2-49  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
3. To Clear a Single Crosspoint Key Memory:  
Hold a key bus crosspoint, single press CLEAR WORK  
BUFR button:  
Clears only the key memory portion of the Current Working  
Buffer for switcher key crosspoints held down. Clears any  
split keys for that key crosspoint.  
4. To Clear Current Working Buffer for a selected E-MEM level  
and clear any split keys for that key crosspoint— including  
Keyers for E-MEM level owning Crosspoint Keyer:  
Hold a key bus crosspoint, double press the CLEAR  
WORK BUFR button.  
CLEAR WORK BUFR is always functional, even when the other  
effects editing buttons are not enabled (KEYFRAME EDITING set to  
DISABLE in the Keyframe Menu).  
The CLEAR WORK BUFR button is normally off, but lights for  
one-half second when pressed.  
NOTE: The “Current Register” is defined as the active register on each  
E-MEM level. If all enabled levels are in the same register, the Current  
Register is the same as that shown in the E-MEM keypad display.  
However, if the enabled levels have different Current Registers, as  
indicated by a “” between the bank number and the register number,  
the Get and Put operations will operate on different registers. For  
example, if enabled level M/E 1 is in Register 1, and enabled level M/E 2  
is in Register 2, a “PUT CUR INTO 03” operation will copy M/E 1  
Register 1 into M/E 1 Register 3, and M/E 2 Register 2 into M/E 2  
Register 3.  
GET provides a method of copying or “getting” the contents of a  
specified register into the current register.  
Get  
The current switcher state and the current register number are  
unaffected.  
2-50  
 
Effects Memory Subpanel  
The GET button is at low tally whenever a get operation is  
permissible and off when the operation is not permissible (no  
current register, locked register).  
When pressed, the GET button high-tallies and the E-MEM  
readout provides a prompt. For example, if Bank 0 and register 7  
are currently selected, the display prompts:  
GET 0x INTO CUR  
(If the bank were 1 and the current register 7, the display  
would show: GET 1x INTO CUR)  
To get the effect from a specific bank and register, change the bank  
number if the correct bank is not already selected, then enter the  
register number of the effect to be copied. Press ENTER to  
complete the GET operation.  
The GET operation does not copy sequence link information  
(sequence link register or sequence delay) to the current register.  
If the current register is locked, the GET operation will not be  
performed, an error beep will sound, and the keypad readout will  
show “REG IS LOCKED”.  
An UNDO of the GET operation will restore the previous contents  
to the current register, without affecting the current switcher state  
or current register number.  
Also, as mentioned previously under the button description, the  
GET button may be used for clearing out the current register by  
pressing GET • ENTER.  
The PUT button provides a method of copying or “putting” the  
contents of the currently selected register into another E-MEM  
register.  
Put  
2-51  
 
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
The PUT button is at low tally whenever a PUT operation is  
permissible and off when the operation is not permissible (no  
current register).  
When pressed, the PUT button high-tallies and the E-MEM  
readout provides a prompt. For example, if Bank 0 and register 7  
are currently selected, the display prompts:  
PUT CUR INTO 0 x?  
To put the current effect into a specific bank and register, change  
the bank number if the correct bank is not already selected, then  
enter the (destination) register number. Press ENTER to confirm  
the PUT operation.  
The PUT operation does not copy sequence link information  
(sequence link register or sequence delay) to the destination  
register.  
If the destination register is locked, the PUT operation will not be  
performed, an error beep will sound, and the keypad readout will  
show “REG IS LOCKED”.  
An UNDO of the PUT operation will restore the previous contents  
to the destination register, without affecting the current switcher  
state or current register number.  
Also, as mentioned previously, the PUT button may be used to  
copy the current register contents into the next empty register by  
pressing PUT • ENTER.  
NOTE: The remainder of the Effect Editing controls deal primarily with  
effect keyframes and effect timelines.  
Refer to “Effects and Keyframes” near the beginning of this  
section for general definitions of effects and keyframes.  
In the Model 2200, a Timeline is a graphical representation (in the  
Timeline menu) of the keyframes and their time relationships on  
a given enabled level in the current E-MEM register. Each enabled  
register has its own timeline.  
2-52  
Effects Memory Subpanel  
The Master Timeline (the top timeline in the Timeline menu) is a  
composite representation of the timelines of all enabled levels in  
the current E-MEM register. All time positions of the effect are  
referenced to the Master Timeline.  
A Master Timeline Keyframe is a point on the Master Timeline that  
has a keyframe on one or more levels at that point in time.  
The Current Time is the time position of the Time Cursor on the  
Master Timeline of the effect.  
The Current Keyframe is the keyframe and its duration on which  
the Time Cursor is positioned.  
Pressing the TIME CURSoR button once brings up the Timeline  
menu of the current E-MEM register. If there is more than one  
keyframe in the effect, the position of the Time Cursor may be  
positioned on the timeline by the (RUN TIME) soft knob in the menu,  
the Run lever arm on the E-MEM panel, or any of the effects  
positioning buttons (GO TO KF, GO TO TIME, NEXT, PREV, or  
REWIND).  
Time  
Cursor  
The MARK CURSoR button is provided for future editing  
operations; however, pressing MARK CURSoR once brings up the  
Timeline menu.  
Mark  
Cursor  
Modes of Insertion/Deletion  
The editing mode selected determines the way keyframes are  
added to or removed from an effect. The editing mode is selected  
by the CONST DUR button (on/ off) on the E-MEM Effects Editing  
panel and by the DELEGATES/ENABLES selection in the Main  
Keyframe menu or the Timeline menu.  
The four editing functions that add keyframes or delete keyframes  
from an effect (Cut, Paste, Insert Before, and Insert After) are  
affected by the selected editing mode and by the position of the  
Time Cursor on the Master Timeline.  
2-53  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
NOTE: Cuts, Inserts, and Pastes cannot be performed on any locked  
level of an E-MEM register.  
Only those levels that are delegated are affected by timeline editing.  
When ENABLES is selected in the Timeline menu or the main  
Keyframe menu, all enabled levels are also delegated; thus all  
levels are affected. When DELEGATES is selected in the menu, only  
specified enabled levels are delegated; all other enabled levels are  
enabled but not delegated.  
NOTE: The DELEGATES selection in the Timeline menu and main  
Keyframe menu is discussed in the Effects Editing section of this manual.  
Constant Duration Off  
The following pages describe the operation of the keyframe  
insertion/ deletion functions when Constant Duration mode is not  
selected (CONST DUR button at low tally) and ENABLES is selected  
in the Timeline menu or main Keyframe menu.  
NOTE: Refer to the CONST DUR button description for the operation of  
keyframe insertions and deletions in Constant Duration mode.  
When CONST DUR is off, the overall duration of the effect is the sum of  
the durations of the individual keyframes (on the Master Timeline).  
Adding or deleting keyframes or changing the duration of one or more  
keyframes may change the overall duration of the effect.  
On a Keyframe. When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master  
Timeline keyframe, INSeRT BEFORe inserts a keyframe and its  
duration into each delegated level just prior to the current  
keyframe. All subsequent keyframes are “rippled” (pushed out)  
in time by an amount equal to the newly inserted keyframe  
duration. This increases the overall duration of the effect by the  
duration of the inserted keyframe.  
Insert  
Before  
2-54  
     
Effects Memory Subpanel  
The data entered into the keyframe on each delegated level is the  
data in the Current Working Buffer, which is the same as the  
Current Switcher State for that level.  
Unless otherwise specified (see KF DUR), the duration of the  
inserted keyframe is the same as that of the current keyframe.  
Any delegated level that does not have a keyframe at that point in  
time will have a keyframe inserted just before the current  
keyframe.  
On the Path. When the Time Cursor is “on-the-path” (not on a  
Master Timeline keyframe), the INSeRT BEFORe button is tallied  
off and the Insert operation is not allowed.  
On a Keyframe. When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master  
Timeline keyframe, INSeRT AFTER inserts a keyframe and its  
duration into each delegated level immediately following the  
duration of the current keyframe (in other words, just before the  
next keyframe). All subsequent keyframes are “rippled” (pushed  
out) in time by an amount equal to the newly inserted keyframe  
duration. This increases the overall duration of the effect by the  
duration of the inserted keyframe.  
Insert  
After  
The data entered into the keyframe on each delegated level is the  
data in the Current Working Buffer, which is the same as the  
Current Switcher State for that level.  
Unless otherwise specified (see KF DUR), the duration of the  
inserted keyframe is the same as that of the current keyframe.  
Any delegated level that does not have a keyframe at that point in  
time will have a keyframe and its duration inserted just after the  
current keyframe. The current time position moves to the time  
point of the newly-inserted keyframe.  
On the Path. When the Time Cursor is located “on-the-path” (not  
on a Master Timeline keyframe), INSeRT AFTER inserts a  
keyframe on each delegated level but does not add time to the  
overall effect.  
2-55  
 
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
The data entered into the keyframe on each delegated level is the  
data in the Current Working Buffer, which is the same as the  
Current Switcher State for that level. This includes the values of all  
parameters at that point, interpolated on-the-path between the  
two keyframes, plus any changes that may have been made on the  
control panel and in the menus since stopping at that point on the  
timeline.  
The duration of the inserted keyframe is the difference between  
the point of insertion and the position of the next keyframe. The  
duration of the previous keyframe (what had been the current  
keyframe) is decreased by the same amount. The current time  
position remains at the point of the newly-inserted keyframe.  
Cut  
When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master Timeline  
keyframe, CUT deletes the keyframe from any delegated level that  
has a keyframe, and deletes the duration of the Master Timeline  
keyframe from all delegated levels, even those that do not have a  
keyframe at that point. All subsequent keyframes are rippled  
backward in time (toward Time 0) by an amount equal to the  
duration on the Master Timeline of the deleted keyframe. This  
decreases the overall duration of the effect by the duration of the  
cut keyframe.  
When the Time Cursor is not on a Master Timeline keyframe, the  
CUT button is disabled and the Cut operation is not permitted.  
COPY makes a copy of the data in the Current Working Buffer, for  
all delegated levels, and places it in the Clipboard Buffer. No  
changes are made to the effect.  
Copy  
If the Time Cursor is on a keyframe on the Master Timeline when  
the Copy is done, the duration of the copied keyframe is the  
duration of the Master Timeline keyframe. If the current time  
position is on-the-path on the Master Timeline, the keyframe  
duration is the difference between the current time position and  
the position of the next keyframe.  
The keyframe can then be pasted into another effect (same levels)  
or into another point in the same effect (same levels).  
2-56  
   
Effects Memory Subpanel  
The PASTE button inserts a keyframe (on all delegated levels) into  
an effect. This operation is essentially the same as doing an Insert  
After, with the following exceptions: For a Paste, the data to be  
inserted comes from the Clipboard Buffer, rather than from the  
Current Working Buffer, and the keyframe duration also comes  
from the Clipboard if the Paste is done on a keyframe. If the Paste  
is done on-the-path, the keyframe duration is handled the same as  
that of an Insert After, adding no time to the effect.  
Paste  
Constant Duration On  
The following paragraphs describe the operation of keyframe  
insertion/ deletion in Constant Duration mode. Refer to the  
previous portion of this section for operation with Constant  
Duration turned off.  
CONST DUR forces the overall duration of an effect to be constant  
during editing, except as noted here. The length of the existing  
effect is unchanged by keyframe deletions (cuts) or additions  
(inserts or pastes). When CONST DUR is on, the button is high-  
tallied; when off, it is low-tallied if edit mode is enabled, or tallied  
off if edit mode is off.  
Const  
Dur  
Also, in Constant Duration mode, the KF DUR button is tallied off,  
indicating that keyframe duration modifications are not allowed.  
All Inserts and Pastes in Constant Duration mode must be made  
on-the-path—they are not allowed on keyframes—except as follows:  
An Insert Before may be done on the first keyframe of an  
effect, or an Insert After or Paste may be done on the last  
keyframe of an effect. The duration and timing of the original  
effect are not affected, but the inserted keyframe is appended  
to the effect, increasing its overall duration.  
2-57  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
When an Insert or Paste is done on-the-path in Constant Duration  
mode, the duration of the inserted keyframe is subtracted from  
that of the previous keyframe.  
A Paste operation in Constant Duration mode is similar to an  
Insert After, except that the data to be pasted comes from the  
Clipboard Buffer, rather than the Current Working Buffer.  
A Cut must be made on a keyframe, whether CONST DUR is on or  
off. If a Cut is done in Constant Duration mode, the keyframe state  
is deleted and the duration of the cut keyframe is added to the  
duration of the previous keyframe. The Time Cursor remains  
positioned at the point of deletion.  
NOTE: The following operations are the same whether CONST DUR is on  
or off.  
Modify Keyframes  
Modify  
When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master Timeline  
keyframe, pressing the MODify button once enters any  
modification that has been made on any delegated level. When  
MODify is pressed, the button high-tallies for one-half second to  
confirm the Mod operation.  
If an individual delegated level does not have a keyframe at the  
time location where a Mod is being done, the Mod operation will  
insert a keyframe on-the-path if any changes have been made on  
that level. The duration of the inserted keyframe is taken from that  
of the previous keyframe. No change is made to the overall effect  
duration.  
2-58  
     
Effects Memory Subpanel  
Modify All Keyframes (Relative)  
When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master Timeline  
keyframe, pressing the MODify button twice applies any  
modification that has been made on any delegated level to all  
keyframes on that level. For instance, if you want to change the  
background color by 180° in all keyframes on the M/ E 1 level,  
place the cursor on any keyframe, change the background color,  
and press MODify twice (generally referred to as Mod All Relative  
operation).  
It is also possible to modify all keyframes on a given level to a  
single value (for example, changing the background to Blue in all  
keyframes on that level) by doing a Mod All Absolute operation.  
This function is accessed through the Keyframe menu, as  
described in the menu descriptions portion of this manual  
KF DUR allows you to change the duration of the current keyframe  
or to set the duration of a keyframe to be inserted. If not all  
delegated levels are on a keyframe, or if different delegated levels  
have differing keyframe durations, pressing KF DUR will add an  
appropriate change to the current keyframe duration on all levels.  
KF  
Dur  
When pressed, KF DUR high-tallies and the E-MEM display shows  
the current keyframe duration:  
KF DUR SSS:FF.f  
where SSS=Seconds, FF=Frames, and f=field(s) of the desired  
keyframe duration.  
2-59  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
A new duration may be entered as follows on the E-MEM keypad:  
1
S S S • F F • f ENTER  
The keyframe duration is then applied to all delegated levels by  
pressing MODify once.  
Effect  
Dur  
The EFFect DUR button is provided for future editing operations.  
PREV and NEXT are used to step the effect forward or backward to  
the next keyframe on the Master Timeline.  
Prev  
Next  
When the PREV or NEXT button is pressed, it high-tallies for one-  
half second to confirm the operation.  
The PREV button is off at the beginning of an effect or if the effect  
has zero or one keyframe. The NEXT button is off at the end of an  
effect or when the effect has zero or one keyframe.  
GO TO TIME enables positioning of the effect to a specific position  
on the Master Timeline. When GO TO TIME is active, the desired  
time is entered as follows on the E-MEM keypad:  
Go To  
Time  
SSS•FF•fENTER  
where SSS=Seconds, FF=Frames, and f=field(s) of the desired  
point in time  
or as abbreviated above under KF DUR.  
GOTO KF moves the Time Cursor to the specified keyframe on the  
Master Timeline.  
Go To  
KF  
1. Not all digits are required for defining the time. The system will recognize the button presses to de-  
termine which digits are seconds, which are frames, and which are fields. For instance, to enter 2  
seconds and 5 frames (65 frames or 130 fields), you would need only to enter:  
2 • 5 ENTER  
or • 6 5 ENTER  
or • • 1 3 0 ENTER  
In all of these cases, the display will show:  
KF DUR 002:05.0  
2-60  
       
Effects Memory Subpanel  
To move to the desired keyframe, press the GOTO KF button, enter  
the number on the keypad, then press the ENTER button.  
(A 3-digit number is entered automatically without pressing  
ENTER).  
The MARK button is provided for future clipboard operations.  
Mark  
The MARK BLOCK button is provided for future clipboard  
operations.  
Mark  
Block  
NOTE: Refer to the Effects Editing section of this manual for additional  
information on use of the Effect Editing controls.  
Run Controls  
The Run controls, which are above the E-MEM Subpanel,  
determine the manner in which the selected E-MEM effect  
will run.  
Stop  
Next  
KF  
Hold  
Input  
Reverse  
Rewind  
Run  
Run Control  
Figure 2-9. E[MEM Run Controls  
2-61  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Pressing STOP NEXT KF causes an effect to be stepped through,  
Stop  
Next  
KF  
one Master Timeline keyframe at a time. When on, STOP NEXT KF  
causes run commands to last the duration of one keyframe, and  
a time. The button is at high tally when the function is selected, at  
low tally when enabled but not selected.  
Hold  
Input  
When HOLD INPUT is enabled (high tally), all crosspoints (video  
and key) on all buses of the switcher are held. That is, the state of  
the crosspoints do not change when an E-MEM recall is done. If  
key memory is on at this time, the current keyer memory state is  
also held. (See Recalling Effects on page 2-38 for information  
about holding crosspoints on individual buses.)  
Pressing the RUN button causes an effect to begin running from its  
current position. The RUN button is also used to stop and resume  
an effect during the run by acting as a run toggle button. The RUN  
button lights during a run, then turns off when the run is  
complete.  
Run  
2-62  
     
Effects Memory Subpanel  
The Run lever arm can be used to manually run an effect.  
Moving the lever arm causes the current effect to run.  
Normally, the position of the lever arm directly corresponds  
to the relative percentage of run completion; however, if  
the lever arm and the effect get out of sync (for example, the  
lever arm is not at an endpoint when a register is recalled),  
the remaining lever arm movement is scaled to the  
remaining effect duration. (Forward direction is scaled to  
the end of the effect; reverse direction is scaled to the start  
of the effect.)  
The Run lever arm may also be used for positioning the  
Time Cursor in the Timeline menu when building an effect.  
The LEDs to the left of the lever arm give a visual indication  
of run completion for either the lever arm or the run button.  
REVerse causes an effect to run backwards. The button may be  
pressed before or during the effect run (on-the-fly). The button  
lights and stays lit when pressed, then toggles off when pressed  
again.  
Reverse  
Rewind  
REWIND positions the current effect at Time 0. If an effect is  
already running when this button is pressed, the effect run stops  
and the effect returns to Time 0. The REVerse button inverts the  
REWIND function. In other words, it positions the effect at the last  
keyframe of the effect. The REWIND button lights for one-half  
second any time it is pressed.  
NOTE: Refer to the Effects Editing section of this manual for additional  
information on use of the Run controls.  
2-63  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Positioner Joystick  
The Positioner joystick allows wipes to be moved from their  
current position to another position on the screen.  
The delegation buttons located below the joystick (Figure 2-10)  
enable control of the primary and (optional) secondary wipe  
patterns to be delegated to either or both M/ Es.  
M/E 1  
Pri  
M/E 1  
Sec  
If all of the delegation buttons are turned off, the joystick is  
disabled.  
M/E 2  
Sec  
M/E 2  
Pri  
NOTE: The position of a wipe pattern cannot be changed if both POS  
NORM and POS AUTO are off for that wipe generator, even if the joystick  
is delegated via its delegation button. See “Wipe Positioner Buttons”  
on page 2-71.  
Selection/Turbo  
Button (2200i)  
M/E 1  
Pri  
M/E 2  
Pri  
M/E 1  
Sec  
M/E 2  
Sec  
Figure 2-10. Positioner Subpanel  
Direction and speed of pattern movement are determined by the  
direction and distance the joystick is moved. The farther it is  
moved from the center position, the faster the pattern moves.  
When released, the joystick returns to its center position, leaving  
the pattern where it is currently positioned.  
2-64  
       
Wipe Subpanel  
Wipe Subpanel  
The Wipe Subpanel (Figure 2-11) is used to control all four of the  
wipe pattern generators in the switcher. Each M/ E has a primary  
wipe generator and may have an optional secondary wipe pattern  
generator. The secondary wipe pattern generator option allows  
complete independence between the primary and secondary  
wipes with no interaction between them.  
Even if the secondary wipe pattern generator option is not  
installed, secondary wipes are available, but only the edge  
attributes of the secondary wipe are independent. (Edge attributes  
include preset size, softness, soft symmetry, border width, border  
matte, border opacity and normal/ reverse.) Pattern select,  
rotation modes, positioner modes, and pattern modifiers are the  
same values as those of the primary wipe generator on the same  
M/ E.  
Wipe  
User  
User  
User  
1
3
5
User  
User  
User  
2
4
6
Soft  
Symmetry Softness  
Border  
Aspect  
Opacity  
Width  
Menu  
Random  
Texture  
User  
Wipe  
Undo  
Learn  
User  
Wipe  
Preset Size Aspect  
Rotate  
Speed  
Rotate  
Mag  
Pos  
Norm  
Rotate  
Pos  
Reverse  
Flip  
Flop  
Pos  
Auto  
Normal  
Split  
H
Multi  
V
Multi  
Rotate  
Rotation Type  
Wipe Direction  
Pattern Modifiers  
Positioner  
Pattern  
Mix  
M/E 1  
Pri  
M/E 1  
Sec  
M/E 2  
Pri  
M/E 2  
Sec  
Pattern Mix  
Delegate  
Figure 2-11. Wipe Subpanel  
2-65  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
The transition WIPE button in the Transition Subpanel always uses  
the primary wipe generator. Preset wipes, masks, and matte wash  
can also use the secondary wipe generator.  
Wipe Delegation  
Pressing any one of the Wipe delegation buttons  
at the bottom of the Wipe Subpanel delegates the  
entire Wipe Subpanel to the named wipe  
generator.  
M/E 2  
Pri  
M/E 2  
Sec  
M/E 1  
Pri  
M/E 1  
Sec  
Wipe Pattern Buttons  
Pressing any of the Wipe pattern buttons (see Figure 2-11) selects  
that wipe pattern and lights the button. These buttons are  
mutually exclusive (including MENU); pressing one selects a  
pattern and de-selects the previously active pattern. Pressing the  
MENU pattern button selects a pattern that was previously chosen  
in the pattern menu. Double-pressing the MENU button opens the  
wipe pattern menu. Wipe patterns not available on the pattern  
select panel may be selected through the Wipe menu, described  
later in this section under “Menu Descriptions.”  
Menu  
Random  
Texture  
RANDOM selects one of the available random patterns.  
TEXTURE selects a user-adjusted texture pattern, selected in the  
Wipe Texture menu.  
2-66  
               
Wipe Subpanel  
LEARN USERWIPE – The six USER 1 - USER 6 wipe buttons let you  
learn a wipe effect into memory and then recall it all at once.  
Everything on the Wipe Subpanel is learned except the delegate  
buttons. Upon recall, the stored wipe parameters are transferred  
to the delegated wipe generator. This shared system allows you to  
transfer wipe effects from one wipe generator to another.  
User 1 User 2  
User 3 User 4  
User 5 User 6  
To store a wipe setup, press the LEARN USER WIPE button,  
followed by any one of the six USER buttons. The current wipe  
pattern selection and all modifiers will be memorized into the  
USER register. To recall the wipe effect later, press that USER  
button. After a USER button is pressed, either for a learn or recall  
operation, the button remains lit as a reminder that it was the last  
one used.  
Learn  
User  
Wipe  
USER WIPE UNDO allows an accidental USER wipe recall or learn  
to be “un-done.” When undoing a recall, pressing this button  
restores the panel to the state that existed before the last learn;  
when undoing a learn, it restores the user register to its previous  
state (the control panel is not affected).  
User  
Wipe  
Undo  
Wipe Controls  
Pressing the SOFT button toggles the wipe edge softness on and  
off. When the button is illuminated, wipe edge softness can be  
adjusted with the (SOFTNESS) knob.  
Soft  
The (SOFTNESS) knob controls the amount of wipe edge softness  
when SOFT is on. A setting of full counter-clockwise rotation  
causes zero softness, while full clockwise rotation causes  
maximum softness.  
Softness  
2-67  
             
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Turning the (SYMMETRY) knob controls the relative softness  
between the inside and outside wipe border edges, when the  
SOFT and BORDer, buttons are turned on. The last value of  
(SYMMETRY) is remembered when either BORDer, or SOFT is  
turned off.  
Symmetry  
BORDer toggles control of the wipe border on and off. When  
BORDer is on, the adjacent (WIDTH) and (OPACITY) knobs become  
active for modifying the wipe border. The wipe border is  
functional on transition and preset wipes only.  
Border  
The (WIDTH) knob sets the width of the wipe border when BORDer  
is on. When BORDer is turned off, the last value of (WIDTH) is  
remembered and is recalled when BORDer is turned on again.  
Width  
The (OPACITY) knob controls the opacity or translucence of the  
wipe border when BORDer is on. The (OPACITY) value is  
remembered when BORDer is turned off.  
Opacity  
(PRESET SIZE) adjusts the wipe pattern size for preset patterns  
used in non-transitional wipe patterns. It is also used to adjust the  
size of masks that use the wipe generator.  
Preset Size  
The ASPECT button toggles control of the (ASPECT) knob  
(horizontal to vertical ratio) of the wipe pattern on and off.  
Aspect  
Turning the (ASPECT) knob clockwise from mid-position  
stretches the horizontal axis of the wipe pattern. Similarly, turning  
the knob counter-clockwise from mid-position stretches the  
vertical axis.  
Aspect  
2-68  
             
Wipe Subpanel  
Wipe Rotation Controls  
The 3 wipe rotation buttons, ROtate POS, ROtate  
Rotate  
Pos  
Rotate  
Speed  
Rotate  
Mag  
speed, and ROTate MAG are mutually exclusive and  
toggle on and off. Only one of these buttons can be on  
at a time.  
The (ROTATE) knob, located adjacent to the three rotation type  
buttons, controls whichever mode is enabled. The knob setting for  
each of the three rotation modes is remembered even when the  
modes are de-selected.  
Rotate  
ROT POS (rotate position) allows rotation of the wipe pattern to a  
fixed angle. With this mode on, turning the (ROTATE) knob from  
its mid-position rotates the entire wipe pattern up to four  
complete rotations, either clockwise or counterclockwise.  
Rotate  
Pos  
ROTate SPeeD allows constant rotation of the wipe pattern at a  
rate adjusted by the (ROTATE) knob. Turning the knob clockwise  
or counterclockwise from mid-position causes the wipe pattern to  
rotate up to a maximum of four rotations per second.  
Rotate  
Speed  
ROTate MAG (rotate magnitude) causes the wipe pattern to rotate  
as a function of the transition position (lever arm or auto  
transition). The amount and direction of rotation is adjusted by  
the (ROTATE) knob. Turning the knob clockwise or  
Rotate  
Mag  
counterclockwise causes the wipe pattern to rotate up to a  
maximum of four rotations during the course of the wipe  
transition. The starting angle (or position) of the pattern is  
determined by the ROtate POS value.  
2-69  
           
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Wipe Pattern Mix  
PATTern MIX toggles the pattern mix mode on or off. When PTN MIX  
Pattern  
Mix  
SOURCE is set to NORMAL in the menu, the pattern mix mode causes  
the delegated wipe generator to mix its pattern with the other  
wipe generator pattern on a given M/ E. (The “other wipe  
generator” is the secondary generator if delegated to the primary,  
or the primary generator if delegated to the secondary.) When PTN  
MIX SOURCE is set to TEXTURE, the pattern mix mode causes the  
delegated wipe generator to mix its pattern with the texture  
pattern.  
The adjacent (PATTERN MIX) knob controls the mix ratio between  
the two pattern generators. If the PTN MIX TYPE is NAM+ or NAM-  
(as selected in the Wipe Modifier menu), the pattern mix knob  
controls the relative size of the two patterns. The knob value  
(shared by mix and NAM modes) is remembered when the  
PATTern MIX button is turned off.  
Pattern Mix  
Wipe Direction  
NORMal and REVerse select the wipe direction (normal or reverse).  
One of these buttons is always on.  
Normal  
Reverse  
Flip  
Flop  
FLIP FLOP toggles flip-flop mode on and off. When flip-flop mode  
is on, the wipe direction changes at the end of each wipe  
transition. (The NORMal and REVerse lights alternate on and off  
during a wipe, every time the transition reaches the opposite  
limit.)  
NOTE: The NORMal, REVerse, and FLIP FLOP buttons on the wipe  
subpanel do not affect the primary preset pattern key. Instead, a menu  
selection provides a choice of either NORMAL or REVERSE.  
2-70  
               
Wipe Subpanel  
Wipe Pattern Modifiers  
The SPLIT button toggles split mode on and off. When split mode  
is on, the selected wipe pattern is split into two. Split operation is  
affected by the SPLIT OFFSET button and knob in the Wipe Modifier  
menu.  
Split  
H MULTI and V MULTI allow multiple copies of the same wipe  
pattern to appear.  
H
Multi  
V
Multi  
Pressing H MULTI results in an additional copy of the wipe pattern  
being arranged horizontally (in a row). One additional copy of the  
pattern is supplied for each push of the button, up to a maximum  
of eight rows. Similarly,  
V MULTI produces multiple patterns arranged vertically in a  
column. Pressing both V MULTI and H MULTI at the same time  
results in a grid alignment of multiple patterns.  
If either button is held down for 1/ 2 second, that aspect  
(horizontal or vertical) returns to a single pattern.  
Additional modifiers are available through menus available  
under the Wipe menu. These menus are described in Section  
Three of this manual.  
Wipe Positioner Buttons  
The POS NORM and POS AUTO buttons are mutually exclusive;  
Pos  
Auto  
Pos  
Norm  
only one can be on, although both can be off. If both are off,  
delegating the joystick has no effect on the pattern. See “Positioner  
Joystick” on page 2-64.  
Pressing POS NORM allows you to move the center of the wipe  
solid with the delegated joystick on the positioner subpanel.  
When used for a wipe transition, the POS NORM button may cause  
the wipe edge to pop if the pattern is too far off center when a  
transition is performed.  
2-71  
             
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
The POS AUTO button invokes an auto positioner mode allowing  
you to place a wipe pattern anywhere on the screen. You can then  
make a transition between the wipe pattern and a second video  
source without the second video “popping” at the end of the lever  
arm travel.  
When auto position is selected, the size of the wipe pattern is  
scaled according to the distance it is positioned off-center. That is,  
the wipe pattern gets smaller as it moves away from screen center.  
You can also move the wipe pattern completely off-screen and  
bring it back again.  
Auto positioning may be used with primary, secondary, and  
program/ preset wipes.  
Auto positioning has no effect with matrix (non-solid type) wipe  
patterns.  
2-72  
 
Masks Subpanel  
Masks Subpanel  
The masks subpanel (Figure 2-12) services and controls all video  
key masks in the switcher. A mask is a control signal used to  
modify a key signal. Delegation of the subpanel allows it to  
control any of the masks. Buttons and knobs are provided for  
controlling mask position and aesthetic features.  
Mask  
Top/Gain  
Left  
Right  
Bottom/Clip  
Force  
Mask  
Inhibit  
Mask  
Mask  
Invert  
Box  
Pri  
Wipe  
Sec  
Wipe  
Mask  
Bus  
M/E 1  
Key 1  
M/E 1  
Key 2  
M/E 2  
Key 1  
M/E 2  
Key 2  
Figure 2-12. Masks Subpanel  
2-73  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Mask Delegation  
Pressing one of the delegation buttons selects one of  
the mask generators. Only one button can be on at a  
time.  
M/E 1  
Key 1  
M/E 1  
Key 2  
M/E 2  
Key 1  
M/E 2  
Key 2  
INHibit MASK delegates the mask subpanel controls for adjusting  
the inhibit mask. The actual selection of mask inhibit is performed  
on the keyer subpanel (see the MASK INH discussion under the  
Keyer panel description).  
Inhibit  
Mask  
FORCE MASK delegates the mask subpanel controls for making  
adjustments to a forced mask. The actual selection of force mask is  
performed on the keyer subpanel (see the FORCE MASK  
discussion under the Keyer panel description.  
Force  
Mask  
Auto delegation of the mask subpanel may occur when other  
buttons on the control panel are pressed. (Refer to the Auto  
Delegation discussion earlier in this section.)  
Mask Source Selection  
The top row of buttons (excluding MASK INVert) select sources  
that determine the shape of the mask. These buttons are mutually  
exclusive and one is always active.  
BOX uses a rectangular box generator for the mask. The box is  
completely independent of the wipe systems. The four knobs at  
the top of masks subpanel determine the position of the four sides  
of the box. The box mask has hard edges. Each keyer has its own  
box, so it is possible to have up to six differently sized box masks  
in use at a time.  
Box  
PRI WIPE selects the primary (transition) wipe generator to  
produce the mask. The primary wipe generator in the same M/ E  
provides the mask signal. Wipe Subpanel controls select the  
pattern, size, position and edge softness.  
Pri  
Wipe  
2-74  
               
Masks Subpanel  
SEC WIPE selects the secondary (optional) wipe generator to  
Sec  
Wipe  
produce the mask. The secondary wipe generator in the same  
M/ E provides the mask signal. If the secondary wipe option is not  
installed, the pattern shape and position are the same as the  
primary wipe generator. Pattern size and edge softness are still  
independent of the primary wipe mask source.  
Mask  
Bus  
MASK BUS selects a video source to generate the mask. The mask  
bus is a dedicated video bus in the primary matrix accessed with  
a bus delegate button in the Aux Bus Subpanel of the panel. The  
mask bus permits any primary or re-entered input to be used as a  
mask source. A clip and gain circuit in the mask generator  
processes the selected video input for display in the mask. When  
MASK BUS is selected, the (TOP/GAIN) knob becomes a gain  
control and the (BOTTOM/CLIP) knob becomes a clip control.  
Mask Controls  
Several knobs and one button on the masks subpanel control the  
size and edge characteristics of the mask.  
An edge of the mask cannot be moved past the edge of the raster  
or past the opposite mask edge. On a box mask, as one edge is  
adjusted to reach the opposite mask edge or the edge of the raster,  
the control function stops and the knob beeps. Turning the knob  
in the other direction then shows the mask edge.  
The Mask (TOP/GAIN) and (BOTTOM/CLIP) knobs function only as  
gain and clip controls when the mask source is delegated to the  
Mask bus. The clip and gain-adjusted Mask bus can be frozen in  
the mask frame store (or mask store).  
2-75  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
(TOP/GAIN) is a two-purpose knob whose operation is dependent  
on whether the BOX button or the MASK BUS or MASK STORE  
button is pressed. If BOX is active, the (TOP/GAIN) knob controls  
the top side of the box-style mask (see BOX button description). If  
MASK BUS is active, the (TOP/GAIN) knob controls the gain of the  
Mask bus clipper.  
Top/Gain  
(BOTTOM/CLIP) is a two-purpose knob whose operation is  
dependent on whether the BOX button or the MASK BUS or MASK  
STORE button is pressed, just as with the (TOP/GAIN) knob. If BOX  
is active, the (BOTTOM) knob controls the bottom of the box-style  
mask (see BOX button description). If MASK BUS or MASK STORE  
is active, this knob controls the Mask bus clipper.  
Bottom/Clip  
Right  
The (LEFT) and (RIGHT) knobs control the left and right sides of  
the box-style mask. They are inactive if BOX is not selected.  
Left  
The MASK INVert button inverts the polarity of the signal used to  
create the mask. A mask that normally allows a key inside of a  
box, will allow a key outside the box when MASK INVert is on.  
Mask Invert functions with all mask sources.  
Mask  
Invert  
2-76  
         
Frame Store Subpanel  
Frame Store Subpanel  
The primary functions of the Frame Store option are storage of  
still video and key images and creation of dropshadows behind  
keys. Controls for manipulation of these functions are found on  
the Frame Store Subpanel and menus.  
The Frame Store option allows storage and retrieval of images at  
a 10-bit resolution. Up to four 2-field pages can be stored in both  
the video store and the key store. Video and Key inputs may be  
frozen together or independently. The images can later be read  
with either one- or two-field mode. Either replication or  
interpolation may be used if one field readout is selected.  
Frame Store is controlled from a dedicated group of controls on  
the upper Control Panel. Frame Store is source oriented in that its  
inputs are fed with an AUX/ effects send bus (Aux 4) and the  
outputs are available as primary inputs to the crosspoint matrix.  
You can assemble complex graphics by layering multiple picture  
elements into a final composite image. Adding dropshadows is  
made easier by the provision of a Frame Store real-time  
dropshadow mode. Using this feature, variable-density full-  
resolution shadows can be created from the key signal and  
positioned anywhere within the raster.  
2-77  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Frame Store Features:  
Freeze video and key  
Mosaic, Pseudo-color Bit-map Effects, Blur, Repositioning,  
Strobe, Rectangular Cropping, and Hue Rotate.  
Write after read capability allowing layering of stills in a  
recursive manner. (i.e., frame store could receive output from  
an M/ E that is using the frame store as one of its inputs).  
Ability to provide a real-time drop shadow on a key that can  
be positioned anywhere in the raster. Shadow can be blurred  
independent of Video and Key.  
Frame Store Video and Key may be composited on top of a  
background.  
Four two-field images may be captured.  
1 or 2 fields read when frozen with replicate or interpolation  
on readout.  
Frame Store  
Shadow  
On  
Horizontal Vertical Opacity  
Position Position  
Field 1  
Field 2  
Freeze  
Grab  
Video  
Store  
Key  
Store  
Figure 2-13. Frame Store Subpanel  
2-78  
 
Frame Store Subpanel  
Input Selection  
Aux bus pair 4A/ 4B can be used to supply inputs to the frame  
store video and key channels.  
Output Routing  
Video and key outputs from the frame store are routed to the  
switcher crosspoint matrix and may be used as primary switcher  
inputs. The video and key outputs are also routed to an output  
module for use by external devices.  
If the frame store is not in Freeze mode, its output is delayed by  
2 fields from its input.  
Still Image Storage  
Video and key can be frozen either separately or simultaneously  
through the use of panel controls. In addition, the system has  
read-before-write capability, so stills can be layered in a recursive  
manner. The system accomplishes this by sending the output of  
the frame store to the input of an M/ E for combination with  
another image. A composite is generated that can be fed back to  
the input of the frame store and re-frozen.  
The Video Store and Key Store buttons select whether the Frame  
Store Subpanel is assigned to the video channel or key channel.  
One of these buttons is always lit. Video Store and Key Store may  
be selected simultaneously.  
Video  
Store  
Key  
Store  
Operations that can be independently set for video and key  
channels are as follows:  
Freeze  
Grab  
Field 1 and Field 2  
2-79  
           
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
When Vand KEY 1 are delegated simultaneously, the key channel  
settings are automatically aligned with the video channel settings.  
The Freeze button provides a freeze/ unfreeze function that  
toggles between states. Press once to freeze, press a second time to  
unfreeze. When enabled, this button stops data from being  
written to the frame store, resulting in a frozen image.  
Freeze  
Grab  
Pressing the Grab button updates the frame store with new input  
data and freezes the new data. If freeze is off (moving video is  
coming out of the frame store), pressing Grab turns on freeze.  
Freeze can be turned off again by pressing the FRZE button. If  
freeze is on and Grab is pressed, the frame store is unfrozen for  
two fields and then frozen again. The Freeze button remains lit to  
indicate that freeze is still on. Since the GRAB button initiates a  
single one-time action, it lights only while the button is pressed  
and for a short instant afterward.  
Field1 and Field 2 determine the field, or fields, that are read out  
while the image is frozen. Either field may be selected, or both  
may be selected at the same time. (When unfrozen, the Field  
buttons have no effect.)  
Field 1  
Field 2  
A full frame is always frozen, regardless of the state of these  
buttons. This method of storage allows the operator to decide  
between fields and frames after the image is frozen.  
When an image is read from the frame store in field mode, the  
“other” field is replicated from the selected field (indicated by the  
illuminated Field 1 button), if REPLICATE mode is selected in the  
Video Store menu. If INTERPOLATE mode is selected in the menu,  
the “other” field is interpolated from the selected field.  
2-80  
   
Frame Store Subpanel  
Drop Shadow  
The Drop Shadow button turns shadow mode on and off.  
Drop  
Shadow  
When shadow mode is on, the Horizontal Position and Vertical  
Position knobs adjust the horizontal and vertical offset of the  
shadow from the main key signal. A third knob, Opacity, adjusts  
the opacity of the shadow.  
Horizontal  
Position  
DROP SHDW mode is functional only with primary video inputs  
that have an associated linear key signal or an M/ E in layered  
mode. No clip and gain adjustments are available to the user.  
Dropshadow mode does not reduce the bandwidth of the key  
channel.  
Vertical  
Position  
Drop Shadow is added to the key signal; the video output is  
unaffected. Therefore the Frame Store video and key must be  
composited on top of another layer in order to see the  
dropshadow.  
Opacity  
2-81  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
External Interface Subpanel  
The External Interface Subpanel, located near the left end of the  
upper control panel, provides selection of the type of interface to  
be used to communicate with external devices.  
External Interface  
Editor  
Enable  
GPI  
Enable  
Periph  
Enable  
Figure 2-14. External Interface Subpanel  
The buttons in this subpanel perform the following functions:  
The EDIT Enable button enables or disables editor access to the  
switcher. Initially pressing the button illuminates it and allows  
external control of the switcher through the Editor port. Pressing  
the button a second time turns off the button lamp and disables  
editor control of the switcher. With EDIT Enable off, editor  
protocol messages that affect the switcher are still acknowledged  
by the switcher, although it does not act under Editor control. For  
example, the switcher will still send status information to the  
editor.  
Edit  
Enable  
NOTE: An editor cannot control the EDIT Enable button via software  
protocol. In addition, the EDIT Enable button does not affect  
communication through the other serial ports.  
2-82  
     
External Interface Subpanel  
The GPI enable button enables and disables GPI outputs and  
control of the switcher from GPI inputs. When GPI enable is on,  
control inputs from GPI relay contacts are read by the switcher,  
and GPI outputs from the switcher are also active for external use.  
When the button is off, all GPI inputs and outputs are disabled.  
GPI  
Enable  
The PERIPH Enable button functions in a manner similar to that of  
the EDIT Enable button, except that it controls peripheral access to  
the switcher via any peripheral-configured serial port and it does  
not acknowledge protocol messages while it is turned off.  
Periph  
Enable  
2-83  
   
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Background Subpanel  
The background matte Subpanel controls the two background  
matte generators.  
Background  
M/E 2  
Sec  
Wash  
M/E 1  
Sec  
Wash  
Hue/  
Softness  
Flat  
Matte  
Matte 2  
Saturation/  
Offset  
Bkgd 1  
Bkgd 2  
Brightness  
Figure 2-15. Background Subpanel  
Matte Select Buttons  
The Bkgd 1 and Bkgd 2 select which of the background matte  
generators the matte modifier controls are changing.  
Bkgd 1  
Bkgd 2  
2-84  
         
Background Subpanel  
Matte Modifier Controls  
Four buttons and three control knobs in each matte subpanel  
control the characteristics of the delegated background matte.  
When a Matte Subpanel is delegated away from a matte generator  
the status of the knobs and buttons is remembered  
The FLAT MATTE button selects a non-wash matte for the  
delegated matte generator. Pressing this button deselects all other  
matte mode buttons MATTE 2, PRI WIPE WASH, and SEC WIPE  
WASH on that matte.  
Flat  
Matte  
The MATTE 2 button delegates the matte controls to the second  
matte generator when a matte wash is selected. To select a matte  
wash, press either PRI WIPE WASH or SEC WIPE WASH on that  
matte.  
Matte 2  
PRIWIPEWASH selects the primary (Transition) wipe generator to  
modulate between the two mattes during a wash. Pressing and  
holding this button allows you to change the transition softness  
with the (HUE/SOFTNESS) knob and the offset (position) with the  
(SATURATION/OFFSET) knob.  
Pri  
Wipe  
Wash  
SEC WIPE WASH causes the secondary (optional) wipe generator  
to be used to modulate between the two mattes in a wash.  
Pressing and holding this button allows you to change the  
transition softness with the (HUE/SOFTNESS) knob and the offset  
(position) with the (SATURATION/OFFSET) knob.  
Sec  
Wipe  
Wash  
(HUE/SOFTNESS) knob – Adjusts the hue of the matte. The knob  
also adjusts the softness (gain) of the transition between the two  
matte generators when you hold down the PRIWIPEWASH or SEC  
WIPE WASH, button. Softness is not adjustable while FLAT MATTE  
is active.  
Hue/  
Softness  
(SATURATION/OFFSET) knob – Adjusts the color saturation of the  
matte. The knob adjusts the offset (position) of the wash  
modulation when you hold down the PRIWIPEWASH or SECWIPE  
WASH button. Offset is not adjustable while FLAT MATTE is active.  
Saturation/  
Offset  
(BRIGHTNESS) knob – Adjusts the color brightness of the matte.  
Brightness  
2-85  
                 
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Floppy Disk Drive  
The floppy disk drive (Figure 2-16) is located in the left end of the  
Upper Control Panel.  
Figure 2-16. Floppy Drive  
Operations available by way of the disk drive are  
Formatting disks  
Saving and loading system configurations  
Saving and loading E-MEM register data  
Refer to the Disk Menu portion of Section Three for disk operating  
instructions.  
2-86  
     
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel  
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel  
The PVW AUX buttons are used to select sources for the preview,  
mask, and aux bus facilities. This row of buttons is located along  
the top of the lower section of the Control Panel. (Figure 2-17.)  
Pvw  
Aux  
Black Cam  
1
Cam  
2
Cam  
3
VTR  
1
VTR  
2
VTR  
3
DPM  
1
DPM  
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color  
Shift  
M/E 1 M/E 2  
Pgm Pgm  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Bkgd  
Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only  
Preview Only  
Bus Delegate  
M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 2 M/E 2  
Key 1 Key 2 Key 1 Key 2  
M/E 2  
Pvw  
Pvw  
Aux  
4
Aux  
5
M/E 1  
Pvw  
Mask Aux  
1
Aux  
2
Aux  
3
A
A
Figure 2-17. PVW AUX Source Select and Delegate Buttons  
The PVW AUX crosspoints consist of five groups of buttons:  
Primary Source Select (BLACK... SHIFT)  
Secondary (Re-entry) Source Select (M/E 1 PGM,  
M/E 2 PGM  
Aux 1-2 Effects Send Only Select (M/E 1 A... M/E 2 KEY 2)  
Preview Only Select (M/E 1 PVW... M/E 2 PVW)  
Bus Delegate Select (PVW... AUX 5)  
2-87  
       
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Source Selection  
The first two groups of buttons select primary and  
secondary (re-entry) video/ key sources for PVW,  
MASK, and AUX 1-5 output buses.  
Black  
M/E 2  
Program  
. . .  
The re-entry sources are M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 program outputs  
The selected source button is either bright or dim, depending  
upon its on-air status. All other buttons in the row are unlit.  
Effects Send Buttons  
The Effects Send buttons select output of both video  
and key sources. Key outputs must be associated  
with selected video sources.  
M/E 2  
Key 2  
M/E 1  
A
. . .  
NOTE: The AUX 1-2 EFFECTS SEND ONLY buttons are functional  
only when the Effects Send option is installed. (For Effects Send  
operation, the system automatically configures the aux bus pair (A/B) as  
a video/key pair. It is not necessary to do this in the Aux Bus Format  
menu.)  
Preview Only Select Buttons  
The Preview Only buttons select the desired preview output to  
be viewed on the switched preview monitor. When one of the  
Preview Only buttons is pressed, the PVW bus delegate button  
is automatically selected if it isnt already on.  
M/E 2  
Pvw  
M/E 1  
Pvw  
Choices available on the switched preview output are M/ E 1  
Preview output and M/ E 2 Preview output  
2-88  
             
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel  
Bus Delegate Buttons  
The following delegation sources are available:  
Any of the panel-selectable Aux buses (press one of the AUX  
1... AUX 5 buttons)  
The mask bus (press MASK)  
The preview bus (press PVW)  
One of the Bus Delegate buttons is always lit.  
Preview Bus Selection  
The PVW button enables the selection of the source to be viewed  
on the switched preview monitor. The selection can be any  
primary or secondary input, or any of the PVW ONLY crosspoint  
sources (M/E1 PVW or M/E 2 PVW.  
Pvw  
Mask Bus Selection  
Pressing the MASK button in the Bus Delegate group delegates the  
source select buttons to select a source for the mask generators.  
The MASK button high tallies when the mask bus is contributing  
to the switcher Program output. The Mask Bus Pushbutton in the  
Mask Subpanel must be selected.  
Mask  
2-89  
             
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Aux Bus Selection  
Aux buses 1 through 5 can be used as simple video routing  
Aux  
Aux  
1
aux buses or for sending video and key to an external digital  
device (DPM). Each bus consists of an “A” bus and a “Bbus  
under E-MEM control. The “A” buses are for video only; the  
Bbuses may be configured for either video or key.  
... 5  
To use the Aux bus as a simple routing bus:  
For an “A” bus, press the appropriate Bus Delegate button to  
select the desired Aux bus, then select any primary or re-entry  
source on the PVW AUX row. To select a “Bbus, hold down  
the Bus Delegate button while selecting the primary or re-  
entry source.  
To use an Aux bus for “effects looping” operation:  
Select the layer of the desired M/ E on the Effects Send group  
of buttons. This causes the selected M/ E output to be sent out  
the Aux bus output. Concurrently, a primary switcher input  
(that has previously been chosen to receive the return video  
from the DPM or other external device) is automatically  
routed to the chosen mixer layer for insertion of the processed  
video. The primary input to be used for the return path is set  
up in the Configuration menu.  
2-90  
     
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel  
Effects Send – Looping Mode  
Looping mode takes the output of an M/ E Keyer, sends it to an  
external DPM, then returns the output of the DPM to the  
Mix/ Wipe circuit of the same M/ E in the switcher. This provides  
the effect of inserting a DPM right into the M/ E, between the  
Keyer and the Mix/ Wipe system, as illustrated in Figure 2-18.  
DPM  
SWITCHER  
Aux Bus 1 - 4  
Effects Return Input  
Key 1  
Key 2  
Key 1  
M/E OUT  
M/E  
KEYER  
M/E  
MIXER  
Key 2  
A Bkgd  
B Bkgd  
A Bkgd  
B Bkgd  
Figure 2-18. Effects Send Looping Mode  
1. To select Effects Send looping mode, first press the AUX BUS  
button on the main menu panel, then press the PHYS AUX  
SELECT soft button to select the Aux Bus to be looped. With the  
EFX LOOP MODE button select EXT LOOP.  
2. With one of the BUS DELEGATE buttons, select the (physical)  
AUX BUS (1-2) that you want to use. With the switcher set up  
as described previously for looping, the DPM output will  
automatically be routed to the Mix/ Wipe system of the M/ E  
whose Keyer output you sent to the DPM.  
2-91  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
NOTE: The A and B bus selections apply only when in layered mode.  
3. Select the Keyer output to be sent to the DPM by pressing one  
of the EFFECTS SEND buttons on the PVW/ AUX row of  
buttons (M/E 1 A through M/E2 Key2).  
Effects Send – Non-Looping Mode  
Non-Looping mode takes the output of an M/ E Keyer and sends  
it to an external DPM. The output of the DPM may then be used  
as an input to the switcher and may be selected on any bus on the  
control panel. This allows the output of one Keyer to be  
manipulated by the DPM, then used as a video or key input by the  
other M/ E. See Figure 2-19.  
To crosspoint via  
primary inputs.  
DPM  
SWITCHER  
Aux Bus 1-4  
Key 1  
Key 1  
M/E OUT  
M/E  
KEYER  
M/E  
MIXER  
Key 2  
A Bkgd  
B Bkgd  
Key 2  
A Bkgd  
B Bkgd  
Figure 2-19. Effects Send Non-Looping Mode  
2-92  
     
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel  
1. To select Effects Send non-looping mode, first press the AUX  
BUS button on the main menu panel, and then press the PHYS  
AUX SELECT soft button to select the Aux Bus to be looped. With  
the EFX LOOP MODE button select NO LOOP.  
2. Select the Keyer output to be sent to the DPM by pressing one  
of the EFFECTS SEND buttons on the PVW/ AUX row of  
buttons (M/E 1 A through M/E 2 Key 2).  
NOTE: The A and B bus selections apply only when in layered mode.  
3. With one of the BUS DELEGATE buttons, select the (physical)  
AUX BUS (1-2) that you want to use. With the switcher set up  
as described previously for non-looping, the DPM output will  
be routed to the previously-mapped crosspoint column on the  
Source Select panel.  
4. If the DPM output has been connected to a primary input and  
mapped to one of the crosspoints, it may then be selected as a  
source on any output bus on the Source Select panel.  
Effects Send Loop with Frame Store  
With previous software versions, the output of the Frame Store  
option could not be returned to the M/ E mixer via the effects send  
loop.  
With Software Release 5.2, the Frame Store may now be used with  
the effects send loop to capture the output from a keyer and return  
the frozen image to the mixer of the same M/ E. This is similar to  
using the effects send loop with an external DPM (Digital Picture  
Manipulator).  
NOTE: You must have the Frame Store option and the Effects Send  
option installed in order for this feature to operate.  
2-93  
   
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Frame Store Looping Mode (Figure 2-20) takes the output of an  
M/ E Keyer, sends it to the Frame Store module, then returns the  
output of the Frame Store to the Mix/ Wipe circuit of the same  
M/ E in the switcher. See Figure 2-20. This provides the effect of  
inserting the Frame Store right into the M/ E, between the Keyer  
and the Mix/ Wipe system.  
SWITCHER  
FRAME STORE  
Effects Return Input  
Aux Bus 4 (Model 4000)  
or Aux Bus 2 (Model 2200)  
Key  
1
Key 1  
Key 2  
Key 2  
M/E Out  
M/E  
M/E  
A Bkgd  
B Bkgd  
A Bkgd  
B Bkgd  
KEYER  
MIXER  
Figure 2-20. Effects Send Frame Store Looping Mode  
1. To select Frame Store looping mode, first press the Aux Bus  
button on the main menu panel, then press the BUS SELECT  
soft button in the Aux Bus Menu to select the Aux Bus to be  
looped (AUX 2 for the Model 2200).  
2. With the EFF LOOP MODE button, select FRAMESTORE. This  
sends the output of the selected Keyer to the Frame Store  
option module and connects the output of the Frame Store to  
the Mix/ Wipe system of the same M/ E.  
3. On the Switchers Pvw Aux bus, select the Keyer output to be  
sent to the Frame Store by pressing Aux 2 Effects Send Only  
button on the Model 2200.  
NOTE: The Keyer A selections apply only when in layered mode.  
2-94  
 
Frame Store Subpanel  
Open the Aux Bus Shaping menu by pressing Config on the top  
menu panel, then select AUX BUS FORMAT> and AUX BUS  
SHAPING> in the submenus.  
Set the shaping of the effects send video to SHAPED by selecting  
AUX BUS 4 for the Model 4000 or AUX BUS 2 for the Model 2200,  
then selecting SHAPED with the VIDEO/KEY FMT button.  
In Frame Store loop mode, operation of the Effects Send loop is the  
same as for external looping mode (described in the Users  
Guide), except that manipulation of the Keyer output is done on  
the Frame Stores panel, rather than by an external Digital Picture  
Manipulator.  
NOTE: The Video Store and Key Store need to be unfrozen.  
Frame Store Subpanel  
The primary functions of the Frame Store option are storage of  
still video and key images and creation of dropshadows behind  
keys. Controls for manipulation of these functions are found on  
the Frame Store subpanel, shown below, and in the Frame Store  
menu, described in Section Two.  
2-95  
   
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Frame Store  
Drop  
Shadow  
Horizontal Vertical Opacity  
Position Position  
Field 1  
Field 2  
Freeze  
Grab  
Video  
Store  
Key  
Store  
Figure 2-21. Framestore Subpanel  
Input Selection  
Aux bus pair 2A/ 4B can be used to supply inputs to the frame  
store video and key channels.  
Output Routing  
Video and key outputs from the frame store are routed to the  
switcher crosspoint matrix and may be used as primary switcher  
inputs. The video and key outputs are also routed to an output  
module for use by external devices.  
If the frame store is not in Freeze mode, its output is delayed by 2  
fields from its input.  
2-96  
     
Frame Store Subpanel  
Still Image Storage  
Video and key can be frozen either separately or simultaneously  
through the use of panel controls. In addition, the system has  
read-before-write capability, so stills can be layered in a recursive  
manner. The system accomplishes this by sending the output of  
the frame store to the input of an M/ E for combination with  
another image. A composite is generated that can be fed back to  
the input of the frame store and re-frozen.  
Frame Store Shadow Controls  
The Shadow On button turns shadow mode on and off.  
When shadow mode is on, the Horizontal POSITION and  
Vertical POSITION knobs adjust the horizontal and vertical  
offset of the shadow from the main key signal. A third  
Drop  
Shadow  
Horizontal Vertical Opacity  
Position Position  
knob, OPACITY adjusts the opacity of the shadow.  
Shadow On mode is functional only with primary video inputs  
that have an associated linear key signal or an M/ E in layered  
mode. No clip and gain adjustments are available to the user.  
Shadow On mode does not reduce the bandwidth of the key  
channel.  
Shadow On is added to the key signal; the video output is  
unaffected. Therefore the Frame Store video and key must be  
composited on top of another layer in order to see the shadow.  
2-97  
         
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
The Video Store and Key Store buttons select whether the Frame  
Store subpanel is assigned to the video channel or key channel.  
One of these buttons is always lit, and Video Store and Key Store  
may be selected simultaneously.  
Video  
Store  
Key  
Store  
Operations that can be independently set for video and key  
channels are as follows:  
Freeze  
Grab  
Field 1 and Field 2  
When Video Store and Key Store are delegated simultaneously, the  
key channel settings are automatically aligned with the video  
channel settings.  
The Freeze button provides a freeze/ unfreeze function that  
toggles between states. Press once to freeze, press a second time to  
unfreeze. When enabled, this button stops data from being  
written to the frame store, resulting in a frozen image.  
Freeze  
Grab  
Pressing the Grab button updates the frame store with new input  
data and freezes the new data. If freeze is off (moving video is  
coming out of the frame store), pressing Grab turns on freeze.  
Freeze can be turned off again by pressing the Freeze button. If  
freeze is on and Grab is pressed, the frame store is unfrozen for  
two fields and then frozen again. The Freeze button remains lit to  
indicate that freeze is still on. Since the GRAB button initiates a  
single one-time action, it lights only while the button is pressed  
and for a short instant afterward.  
2-98  
 
Frame Store Subpanel  
Field1 and Field 2 determine the field, or fields, that are read out  
while the image is frozen. Either field may be selected, or both  
may be selected at the same time. When unfrozen, the Field  
buttons have no effect.  
Field 1  
Field 2  
A full frame is always frozen, regardless of the state of these  
buttons. This method of storage allows the operator to decide  
between fields and frames after the image is frozen.  
When an image is read from the frame store in field mode, the  
“other” field is replicated from the selected field (indicated by the  
illuminated Field button), if REPLICATE mode is selected in the  
Video Store menu. If INTERPOLATE mode is selected in the menu,  
the “other” field is interpolated from the selected field.  
2-99  
 
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Remote Aux Bus Panels  
The Remote Aux Control Panels allow you to control the switcher  
aux buses from a remote location. There are three models of the  
(RUs) it occupies in the equipment rack.  
1-RU panel (Option Part Number 088901-00)  
2-RU panel (Option Part Number 088902-00)  
3-RU panel (Option Part Number 088903-00)  
The 1-RU and 2-RU panels (Figure 2-22) are functionally identical.  
The 1-RU panel is designed for areas with very restricted space,  
and has small crosspoint buttons containing LED tally lamps. The  
2-RU panel has large crosspoint buttons with internal tally lamps.  
Each of these panels must be set up to control a specific aux bus  
and must have the setup changed to control another bus.  
M/E M/E M/E  
ON  
AIR  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 SHIFT  
1
2
3
PGM  
Grass Valley Group  
1
13  
2
3
5
6
7
8
10 11  
12  
4
9
14 15 16  
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
M/E  
1
PGM  
SHIFT  
18 19 20 21  
24  
22 23  
17  
Grass Valley Group  
Figure 2-22. 1- RU and 2-RU Remote Aux Control Panels  
2-100  
     
Remote Aux Bus Panels  
The 3-RU panel (Figure 2-23) has large buttons and is designed for  
locations where it is desirable to operate more than one bus. This  
panel will normally control all aux buses but can be set up to lock  
out specific buses.  
1
13  
14 15 16  
2
3
5
6
7
8
10 11  
12  
4
9
SOURCE  
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
M/E  
1
PGM  
SHIFT  
18 19 20 21  
24  
22 23  
17  
AUX  
2A  
AUX  
1A  
AUX  
3A  
AUX  
4A  
AUX  
5A  
AUX  
6A  
AUX  
7A  
AUX  
8A  
AUX  
9A  
DELEGATE  
AUX  
2B  
AUX  
1B  
AUX  
3B  
AUX  
4B  
AUX  
5B  
AUX  
6B  
AUX  
7B  
AUX  
8B  
AUX  
9B  
Grass Valley Group  
Figure 2-23. 3-RU Remote Aux Control Panel  
As many as 32 Remote Aux Panels can be attached to one  
switcher.  
Source Selection  
The Remote Aux Panels are designed to control 48  
inputs (24 unshifted and 24 shifted). For use with the  
2200, inputs 1 through 16 and SHIFT 1 through SHIFT 16  
will be the active crosspoints. Input buttons 17 through  
24 are disabled, as will the M/E 3 and PGM buttons.  
1
24  
. . .  
Each crosspoint lamp on the 2-RU or 3-RU panel will high tally  
when that input is on air. There is an ON AIR lamp on the one RU  
panel which will illuminate to indicate that the selected input is on  
air. The on-air tally can be permanently enabled on all panels.  
2-101  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Rear Panel Switches  
The rear panel includes a number of switches that control  
operating modes, such as address, bus enable, delegate enable,  
and test mode. These switches are set up during installation, as  
described in the Installation section of the Model 2200 Installation  
and Service Manual.  
Remote Aux Operation  
Operation of the Remote Aux Panel is identical to operation of the  
local aux panel installed in the switcher control panel.  
If the switcher setup identifies a bus pair (that is 2A and 2B) as  
video and key, selecting a source on bus 2A will also change 2B.  
To split the key selection will require use of the 3-RU panel or two  
of the 1-RU or 2-RU panels (one set up for each bus).  
More than one Remote Aux Control Panel can attempt to control  
a single aux bus. When two or more panels controlling the same  
bus have source buttons pressed, the panel with the highest  
address will control the source.  
Chop  
The chop function switches rapidly between two inputs; this is a  
test function and not a creative feature. To start the chop function,  
press the first input button then double press the second input  
button. to stop the chop button press any input button for that aux  
bus on any aux panel. Chop must be enabled on the rear of the  
Remote Aux Control Panel.  
2-102  
           
Remote Aux Bus Panels  
Joy Stick Override  
Joy stick override (JSO) causes the normal input selection on the  
aux bus to be overridden and another input to be used in its place.  
To activate joy stick override, press the JSO button; to return to  
normal operation, release the JSO button.  
Programming the Joy Stick Override  
To program the JSO buttons:  
1. Set the test mode switches to 12 (0011)  
The test mode switches are on the rear of the Remote Aux Panel.  
2. Press and hold the JSO switch to be programmed.  
3. Press the desired source button on the Remote Aux Panel.  
4. Release the JSO Switch.  
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the other buttons.  
6. Return test mode switch to 0 (0000).  
2-103  
     
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
Effects Subpanel  
Most of the functions of the buttons shown in Figure 2-24 on the  
Effects Subpanel are used exclusively with the Model 2200-i. For  
the 2200-2, only the Near Side and Far Side functions are available  
on this panel.  
Freeze  
Video  
Freeze  
Key  
Near  
Side  
Far  
Side  
Source  
Camera  
Target  
World  
Axis  
Lock  
Rotate  
Locate  
3D  
Size/  
Locate˚  
Knob  
Control  
Locate  
Axis  
Spin  
Skew  
Persp  
Aspect  
Post  
Xform  
Center  
X
Y
Z
Figure 2-24. Effect Controls  
2-104  
   
Effects Subpanel  
Front and back video image switching may be accomplished via  
Aux Buses connected to a Kaleidoscope or Krystal DPM. The Near  
Side and Far Side buttons (and the Near/ Far Aux Bus Menu  
buttons; they work the same) are used to delgate the Front and  
Back sides of the video image.  
Near  
Side  
Far  
Side  
Video can have a “Front” and “Back” side. The same source  
information can be applied to both sides of the video image, or the  
two sides may be adjusted separately.  
The Near side is the video image which is visible. The Far side is  
the invisible side. The Front and Back may be rotated in any  
manner, but the Near side is always the visible side; and the Far  
side is always the invisible side.  
For more information on Near/ Far Aux Bus Selections, see  
Section 3, Menu Descriptions. For a detailed description of  
Front/ Back and Near/ Far video processing, see Switcher  
Concepts, Manipulating Video Concepts, in the Model 2200 User  
Guide.  
2-105  
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions  
2-106  
Menu Descriptions  
3
Introduction  
This section provides an overview of the Model 2200 menus, and  
detailed descriptions of the menus and submenus and the  
functions they provide. Menu trees in Section 4 show the overall  
menu hierarchy.  
Menu Display Subpanel  
Many Model 2200 features are accessed via the Menu Display on  
the upper control panel. Top-level menus are brought up on the  
display by pressing the appropriate buttons at the left of the Menu  
Display. (Figure 3-1) Except for the button in the lower left corner,  
which is last menu, the two columns under Effects are are used  
with the Krystal DPM functions (that is, the Model 2200-i) when  
so configured.  
Choices are made in the menus by pressing the “soft buttons”  
below the display, and sometimes by making parameter  
adjustments with the “soft knobs” at the right end of the display.  
The buttons to the right of the display are for possible future  
expansion and are not active at this time. These controls are called  
“soft” because their functions change with different menus.  
3-1  
           
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Effect  
Switcher  
Effect˚  
Config  
Picture  
Mixer  
Config  
M/E  
Mode  
Panel  
Setup  
Picture  
Frame  
Keyer  
Chroma  
Key  
Effect  
Oper  
Key/  
Stencil  
Status  
Wipe  
E-MEM  
Key  
Frame  
View  
Run  
Control  
Input/  
Output  
Mask  
Matte  
Graphic  
Display  
Path  
Aux  
Bus  
Frame  
Store  
Clear  
Disk  
Misc  
Menu  
Exit  
Figure 3-1. Menu Display Subpanel  
Top Level Menu Buttons  
The menu system is divided into groups of function-related  
menus. Any group can be accessed by pressing one of the buttons  
on the Menu Display subpanel. This action brings up the  
corresponding top-level menu, which assigns specific functions to  
the soft buttons and knobs.  
Except for the button in the lower left corner, which is last menu,  
the two button columns under Effect are for future use and not  
activated at this time. The LAST MENU button recalls the  
previously chosen menu.  
Illustrations and descriptions of the Switcher menus are provided  
on the following pages.  
3-2  
   
Menu Display Subpanel  
Effect  
Switcher  
Picture  
Mixer  
Config  
M/E  
Mode  
Effect˚  
Config  
Panel  
Setup  
Picture  
Frame  
Keyer  
Chroma  
Key  
Effect  
Oper  
Key/  
Stencil  
Status  
Wipe  
E-MEM  
Key  
Frame  
View  
Run  
Control  
Input/  
Output  
Mask  
Matte  
Graphic  
Display  
Path  
Aux  
Bus  
Frame  
Store  
Clear  
Menu  
Disk  
Misc  
Soft (Function) Buttons and Soft Knobs  
The buttons below the menu display implement the menu-  
selected functions or access lower-level menus. A dedicated EXIT  
button allows you to return to the menu one level higher on the  
menu tree. Buttons are active only if a label appears above the  
button.  
NOTE: Buttons to the right of the menus are for possible future  
expansion and are not active at this time.  
The knobs at the right end of the menu display are available for  
adjusting various parameters. These knobs are active only when  
labels appear adjacent to them in the menu display. Many menus  
do not require the use of the soft knobs.  
3-3  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Menu Display and Graphics  
In addition to specifying functions for the soft buttons and soft  
knobs, the high-resolution menu display is sometimes used for  
showing bit-mapped graphics. For example, menu-selectable  
wipe patterns are displayed when the WIPE button is pressed.  
Menu Delegation  
The Model 2200 also delegates some menus on the Menu Display  
screen to open when specific buttons on the subpanels are double-  
pressed. (The second press must occur within a predetermined  
amount of time.) Table 3-1 lists the buttons that support this  
function.  
NOTE: An opened menu is delegated, where appropriate, to the button  
that opened the menu. For example, double-pressing the KEY 1  
delegation button on the M/E 1 Keyer panel causes the keyer menu to  
open and the menu controls to be delegated to keyer 1 of M/E 1.  
3-4  
     
Menu Display Subpanel  
Table 3-1. Menu Delegation  
Subpanel  
Button Double-Pressed Delegated Menu  
Comments  
Transition  
Keyer  
BKGD B  
M/E Mode menu  
Keyer menu  
KEY 1 and KEY 2  
Keyer  
(Layered Mode)  
BKGD B, BKGD A,  
KEY 1, and KEY 2  
Keyer menu  
Keyer  
PRI PreSeT PaTTerN Wipe Modifier menu  
or SEC PreSeT  
Used to set PST PTN  
DIRECTION  
PaTTerN  
Keyer  
CHR KEY  
Chroma Key menu  
Chroma Key menu  
Chroma Keyer  
M/E 1 KEY 1 through  
M/E 2 KEY 2  
Wipe  
Wipe  
Wipe Pattern MENU  
Wipe Pattern menu  
Wipe Modifier menu  
M/E 1 PRI through  
M/E 2 SEC  
Wipe  
Wipe Pattern  
TEXTURE  
Wipe Texture menu  
Source Select  
Any of the following  
delegated buses:  
M/E 1 Key 1  
M/E 1 Key 2  
M/E 1 Key A  
Any Primary or  
Clear Key Memory  
M/E 1 Key B  
M/E 2 Key 1  
Secondary Crosspoint menu (submenu under  
Misc menu)  
M/E 2 Key 2  
M/E 2 Key A  
M/E 2 Key B  
Aux 1 through Aux 5 (if  
configured as a video  
and a key)  
3-5  
 
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Menu Descriptions  
This section describes all system menus functions and the soft  
buttons and soft knobs accessed by each. (The Configuration  
menus are also described in the User Guide, with additional  
information on external device configurations.)  
The menus are presented in hierarchical order. After each top  
level menu, the submenus under that top level menu are  
described. All menus and submenus are listed in the local Table of  
Contents at the beginning of this section. In addition, the menu  
structure is also depicted in graphical form in Section Three,  
Menu Trees.  
The top level menus may be displayed by pressing the buttons at  
the left of the Menu Display. Submenus are then brought up by  
pressing the soft buttons at the bottom of the display. Each menu  
function that will call up a submenu is indicated by a “>” symbol  
at the end of the function name.  
Some menus or submenus may also be brought up by automatic  
menu delegation which is activated by double-pressing certain  
buttons on the control panel. Auto delegation is discussed near  
the beginning of Section One, Control Panel Descriptions.  
NOTE: The following menu descriptions are for the two button columns  
under Switcher. The Effects menu buttons are for future use and not  
activated at this time.  
3-6  
 
Configuration Menus  
Configuration Menus  
The Configuration Menus are accessed by pressing the mixer  
CONFig button on the Menu Display Subpanel. This displays the  
Configuration menu and the sub-menu choices.  
The Configuration Menus are used to set up the switcher to the  
requirements of the site or job. The system parameters to be used  
at a particular site are usually configured following installation of  
assigning the sources to crosspoints, setting output levels, and  
defining external interfaces. These menu items are accessed  
through the Configuration menu.  
NOTE: While only one configuration can be active at a time, it is  
possible to store more than one configuration setup on disk and retrieve  
it for later use. See Load File Menu on page 3-134.  
CONFIGURATION MENU  
/config  
USER  
PREFS >  
SYSTEM  
PARAM >  
EXTERN  
I/F >  
AUX BUS  
FORMATS>  
INPUTS >  
OUTPUTS >  
3-7  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
The following items are accessed through the configuration  
menus:  
USER PREFS > — Set up operating parameters, such as Keyer  
and Preview preferences.  
Keyer Prefs  
Preview Prefs  
Define Defaults  
SYSTEM PARAMS > — Set aspect ratio, the matte generator  
limiter and the system clock.  
Matte Gen Lim  
Set Clock Menus (Date / Time)  
INPUTS > — Define your inputs and name crosspoint buttons.  
Map Inputs and Name Crosspoint Button  
Chr Key Inputs  
GPI Inputs  
OUTPUTS > — Adjust the luminance and chroma limiter  
settings on the switcher outputs.  
EXTERN I/F > — Select or change settings for the Editor, DPM,  
and Peripherals Interfaces connected to the Model 2200.  
Editor I/ F  
DPM I/ F  
Peripheral I/ F  
AUX BUS FORMAT> — Sets the “BAux Bus on Aux buses  
3B— 5B to be either a separate video or key bus to accompany  
the corresponding “A” Aux Bus. Set Aux Buses 1A through  
2B (physical/ logical) for shaped or unshaped video output.  
Aux Shaping  
3-8  
User Preferences  
User Preferences  
From the Configuration Menu, press the USER PREFS > button to  
bring up the User Preferences Menu. Use the User Preferences  
Menu to access the various user preference submenus described  
below.  
USER PREFS MENU  
config/user prefs  
LATCH  
NORMAL  
SHIFT  
MODE  
KEYER  
PREFS >  
PREVIEW  
PREFS >  
BEEPER  
PREFS >  
DEFINE  
DEFAULTS >  
1. Select either LATCH or NORMAL with the SHIFT MODE soft  
button.  
The LATCH selection allows you to lock any switcher  
crosspoint bus into a shifted (UPPERCASE) state. This allows  
ready access to those input sources mapped to shifted  
crosspoints. (See “Setting Input Characteristics” on  
page 3-21.)  
3-9  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
With LATCH enabled on the User Preferences Menu, press and  
hold the SHIFT button while selecting a crosspoint. The bus  
containing that crosspoint is now locked into a shifted state.  
Any crosspoint selected on this bus will now be a shifted  
crosspoint. The SHIFT button light will remain ON while the  
bus is in this state.  
To unshift a bus, press and hold the SHIFT button. Select a  
crosspoint button. The bus is now unshifted, and the SHIFT  
button lamp is OFF.  
1. Select the KEYER PREFS button to display the Keyer  
Preferences menu.  
2. Select the PREVIEW PREFS button to display the Preview  
Preferences menu.  
3. Select the Beeper PREFS> — button to display the Beeper  
Preferences menu.  
4. DEFINE DEFAULTS> — Opens the Define Defaults menu,  
which allows you to change the default values used when the  
switcher is turned on.  
Press exit to return to the Configuration menu.  
3-10  
User Preferences  
Keyer Preferences  
From the User Preferences menu, press the KEYER PREFS> button  
to display the Keyer Preferences menu:  
KEYER PREFS MENU  
config/user prefs/keyer prefs  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
DSK  
DROP  
KEY  
MEMORY  
CLEAR KEY  
MEM>  
1. Press the DSK DROP button to turn on or off the DSK drop  
feature. Select either ON or OFF.  
2. Press the KEY MEMORY button to turn on or off the key  
memory feature. Select either ON or OFF.  
3. CLEAR KEY MEM> — Opens the Clear Key Memory menu,  
which allows you to clear the key memory settings for various  
areas of the switcher.  
Press EXIT to return to the User Preferences menu.  
3-11  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Clear Key Memory Menu  
From the Keyer Preferences menu, press the clear key mem>  
button to display the Clear Key Memory menu:  
CLEAR KEY MEMORY MENU  
config / user prefs / keyer prefs / clear key mem  
CURRENT  
XPT  
7
Press a button below to clear key memory for –  
CLEAR XPT: the current xpt on the selected bus  
CLEAR BUS: all xpts on the selected bus  
CLEAR SECTION: all xpts on all buses in the selected section  
CLEAR SWITCHER: all xpts in the switcher  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
DSK  
A
B
AUX  
KEY 1  
KEY 2  
MASK  
SECTION  
SELECT  
BUS  
SELECT  
CLEAR  
XPT  
CLEAR  
BUS  
CLEAR  
SECTION  
CLEAR  
SWITCHER  
The Clear Key Memory menu selections are as follows:  
SECTION SELECT and BUS SELECT — Select the area of the  
switcher whose key memory you wish to clear.  
After selecting the section and bus, press the specific  
crosspoint desired on the selected bus. (The number of that  
crosspoint will appear in the CURRENT XPT box in the menu.)  
When AUX is selected, bus choices are 1 through 5. And when  
MASK is selected, the BUS SELECT and CLEAR SECTION  
choices disappear.  
CLEAR XPT, CLEAR BUS, CLEAR SECTION, and CLEAR SWITCHER  
— Perform the Clear operation for the selected memory area.  
Press exit to return to the Keyer Preferences menu.  
Press exit again to return to the User Preferences menu.  
3-12  
 
User Preferences  
Preview Preferences  
From the User Preferences menu, press the PREVIEW PREFS>  
button to display the Preview Preferences menu:  
PREVIEW PREFS MENU  
config / user prefs / preview prefs  
PUSH TO PREVIEW TIMEOUT  
= 3 secs  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
PGM  
ALL KEYERS  
OFF  
LOOKAHEAD  
ALL KEYERS  
DELEG KEYER  
ON  
LOOKAHEAD  
PGM  
M/E 2  
OFF  
OFF  
PVW  
SELECT  
PVW  
MODE  
DIM  
PVW  
PUSH TO  
PVW  
1. Select the preview from M/ E 1 or M/ E 2 using the PVW  
SELECT button.  
2. Use the PVW MODE button to select the preview mode desired  
for the selected switcher subsystem:  
NOTE: The optional M/E Preview Mezzanine must be installed for each  
M/E in order to select LOOKAHEAD Preview Mode. This selection will  
not be displayed in the menu if the mezzanine board is not installed.  
The Preview Mode choice depends on how many monitors you  
have per M/ E, and how you wish to use them (see Figure 3-2).  
LOOKAHEAD— Use to review what is going on-air next.  
Always shows the next transition of the selected M/ E.  
3-13  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
PGM — Use this selection to have the PGM output of the M/ E  
displayed on the Preview monitor. (Useful if your PGM  
monitor goes down — signal is feed from the switched PVW  
output.)  
PGM  
M/E 2 PGM Out  
Switcher  
Fixed  
PVW  
Lookahead  
M/E 2 PVW Out  
2 Monitors per M/E  
PGM Out - Low Tally  
Lookahead - Hi Tally  
PVW Out  
AUTO  
Switcher  
1 Monitor per M/E  
Switcher  
PVW Out  
PGM  
Fixed PGM  
(In effect, no PVW  
function enabled.)  
1 Monitor per M/E  
Figure 3-2. . Preview Mode Configurations  
3-14  
 
User Preferences  
3. Press the DIM PVW button to dim the preview of all keyers  
using a mask in that M/ E or to turn off the preview dim  
function so that the preview never dims regardless of  
masking.  
4. Assign one of the following Dim Preview modes:  
ALL KEYERS — the preview of all keyers using a mask in that  
M/ E will dim the Preview monitor.  
DELEG KEYR — only the keyer which is currently delegated  
and doing a mask in that M/ E or DSK will dim the Preview  
monitor.  
OFF preview never dims, regardless of masking.  
5. Press the push to pvm button to enable/ disable the push to  
preview mode for the entire switcher. Hold down the key  
delegate button (for example key 1 or key 2 on the Keyer  
panel) of the appropriate keyer for 1/ 2 second or more to  
display the M/ E look-ahead preview along with the selected  
keyer output on the switched preview monitor.  
When the key delegate button is released, the preview display  
remains on for a programmed time-out period, as set by the  
Push to Preview Timeout soft knob, before reverting to its  
original state.  
Push to Preview Timeout— Sets how long the preview will  
remain on after you have released the key delegate button.  
The default value for the auto preview is 3 seconds. Any  
adjustments to clip or gain resets the time-out, thus  
maintaining the auto preview mode while making clip and  
gain adjustments.  
Press EXIT to return to the User Preferences menu.  
3-15  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Beeper Preferences  
You may wish to customize the beeper alert system. Beeper  
preferences are selected on the Configuration/ User Preferences  
Menu/ Beeper Preferences Menu shown below.  
BEEPER ON/OFF — Use to enable or disable the beeper alert  
system.  
WARNING — Use to enable or disable beeper warnings. (For  
example: On the Keyer Copy Menu, if you try to copy M/ E 1  
Key 1 to M/ E 1 Key 1 (copy a key onto itself) you will get a  
beep with Beeper Prefs selection: WARNING ON.)  
END OF KNOB — Enable or disable the beeper alert that  
sounds when the knob is turned to either end of its’ range.  
KNOB CENTER — Enable or disable the beeper alert that  
sounds when the knob is turned to the center of its’ range.  
INACTIVE KNOB — Enable or disable the beeper alert for  
knobs “turned off” during the current switcher state.  
BEEPER PREFS MENU  
config/user prefs/beeper prefs  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
BEEPER  
ON/OFF  
END OF  
KNOB  
KNOB  
CENTER  
INACTIVE  
KNOB  
WARNING  
3-16  
   
User Preferences  
Define Defaults Menu  
From the User Preferences menu, press the define defaults>  
button to display the Define Defaults menu: This menu allows  
you to change the default values that are stored in memory and  
used when the switcher is turned on or the CLEAR WORK BUFR  
button is pressed.  
DEFINE DEFAULTS MENU  
config / user prefs / define defaults  
Set Default State to Current Switcher State. All M/Es will use ME1 settings  
Set Default State to GVG Factory Default.  
ME1  
ME2  
M/E  
SELECT  
GVG  
DEFAULT  
SET  
DEFAULT  
The Define Defaults menu selections are as follows:  
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E whose settings are to be used  
during power-up. (Only one set of values is stored for the M/ Es,  
therefore both M/ Es use the same values at boot-up.) The  
switcher panel (including the selected M/ E) is used to set up the  
switcher default values.  
SET DEFAULT — Enters the new default values.  
GVG DEFAULT — Restores the factory-set default values to the  
switcher.  
Press exit to return to the User Preferences menu.  
Press exit again to return to the Configuration menu.  
3-17  
     
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
System Parameters  
From the Configuration menu, press the System parameters>  
button to bring up the System Parameters menu.  
SYSTEM PARAMETERS MENU  
config/system param  
XMITABLE  
VALID RGB  
BOTH  
FIELD 1  
FIELD 2  
NONE  
4 X 3  
16 X 9  
NONE  
FIELD  
DOMINANCE  
ASPECT  
RATIO  
MATTE  
GEN LIM  
SET  
CLOCK >  
1. ASPECT RATIO — Soft button may be set to either the 4 x 3 or  
16 x 9 setting, depending on your installation requirements.  
2. FIELD DOMINANCE — (FIELD DOMINANCE set to NONE),  
selection changes become effective at the beginning of the  
next field (immediately after the functions have been  
changed).  
Using Field Dominance  
If the Model 2200 output is going to be recorded onto tape that will  
later be edited along with other tape, it is important that changes  
take place consistently on the same field. They can occur on either  
Field 1 or Field 2 of the frame, but need to be on the same field  
every time. If this is not done, there will be a “flash” at the edit in  
the resulting taped video.  
3-18  
     
System Parameters  
With FIELD 1 selected as the dominant field, if a change takes  
place just prior to Field 1, the change will become effective at the  
beginning of Field 1. But if the change takes place prior to Field 2,  
the change will be delayed by one field so that it also becomes  
effective at the beginning of the next Field 1. This way, all changes  
will be synchronized to take place at the beginning of Field 1.  
Similarly, if FIELD 2 were selected as the dominant field, those  
changes that take place prior to Field 1 would be delayed until  
Field 2.  
If you are recording the switcher output on video tape and will be  
doing post-production editing of the tape, it is recommended that  
you set Field Dominance for a specific field (either FIELD 1 or  
FIELD 2), and leave it at that setting. This will ensure that all  
changes will take effect consistently on the same field.  
If an Editor or a GPI trigger initiates one of these functions, it will  
produce the same effect as a control panel change. That is, the  
initiation of any of these functions will be delayed until the  
beginning of the selected dominant field.  
3. Set the matte generator chroma limiting algorithm by  
toggling through the available choices. The MATTE GEN LIM  
selections are:  
XMITABL — Prevents the total signal (luminance and  
chrominance) from exceeding the NTSC transmission  
standard.  
VALID RGB — Limits colors to those which generate red,  
green, and blue values within the 0 to 100% range.  
BOTH — Selects a valid RGB color limiter which also prevents  
the encoded signal envelope from exceeding NTSC  
transmission level. This is the system default mode.  
NONE — Turns off all algorithm methods for matte generator  
limiting.  
4. Press SET CLOCK> to open the Set Clock menu to set the  
system time and date.  
Press exit to return to the Configuration menu.  
3-19  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Set Clock Menu  
From the System Parameters menu, press the SET CLOCK > soft  
button to display the Set Clock menu. If the date and/ or time are  
incorrect, they may be reset as follows:  
SET CLOCK MENU  
YEAR  
=1994  
config/system param/set clock  
MONTH  
= March  
CLOCK  
April 1, 1994  
8:31 AM  
DAY  
= 4  
Press "CONFIRM" button  
to update the clock  
setting.  
DATE  
TIME  
SELECT  
CONFIRM  
1. Set the date by selecting DATE with the SELECT button and  
turning the soft knobs to select the appropriate YEAR, MONTH,  
and DAY.  
2. Press the CONFIRM button to enter the new date.  
3. Set the time by selecting TIME with the SELECT button and  
using the soft knobs to select the HOUR, MINUTE, and  
SECOND.  
3-20  
     
System Parameters  
HOUR  
= 5 PM  
SET CLOCK MENU  
config / system param / set clock  
MINUTE  
= 7  
CLOCK  
December 5 1993  
5:07:53 PM  
Press "CONFIRM" button  
to update the clock  
setting  
SECOND  
= 0  
DATE  
TIME  
SELECT  
CONFIRM  
4. Press the CONFIRM button to enter the new time.  
Press EXIT to return to the System Parameters menu.  
Press EXIT again to return to the Configuration menu.  
Setting Input Characteristics  
Primary video and key inputs to the switcher are numbered 1  
through 32 (16 unshifted and 16 shifted). Any of these inputs can  
be treated as either a video or key signal. During the installation  
procedure, each of the 32 input buses is assigned a video signal, a  
key signal, and a chroma key signal. All inputs are defined by  
function, name, crosspoint, input number, and signal format.  
3-21  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Each input, including internally generated signals such as black  
and background, can be mapped to any vertical column of source  
select (“crosspoint”) buttons. You may determine the input  
assignments and the characteristics of the input signals through  
the use of the Configuration submenus, as described in the  
following procedures.  
NOTE: The external video and key assignments are set up following  
installation to correspond to the video and key inputs connected to the  
frame. These assignments should never be changed by the operator.  
Configuring the Black Crosspoint  
BLACK  
When mapping inputs to pushbuttons, one of the choices in the  
Configuration menu is BLACK, and another choice is NONE. Your  
selection will have an effect on how PRESET BLACK operates, and  
what will happen in the event the controller CPU fails.  
When the first transition during a preset black operation is  
completed, the left most BLACK crosspoint is automatically  
selected on the A Background bus. If black has not been assigned  
to any pushbutton, the PRESET BLACK button is disabled and the  
preset black function is not permitted. If a pushbutton is assigned  
to NONE, black appears when that button is selected; however the  
preset black function will not use this as the BLACK crosspoint.  
Processor Failure  
The BLACK crosspoint is also important in the situation where the  
Controller main CPU fails while one of the M/ Es is performing a  
re-entry. When it fails, the M/ Es are required to abandon their re-  
entry crosspoints and select BLACK on the same bus. In the case  
where black was never assigned to a pushbutton, the M/ E selects  
the left most crosspoint on the bus.  
3-22  
     
Inputs Menu  
Inputs Menu  
From the Configuration menu, press the INPUTS > button to access  
the Inputs menu:  
INPUTS MENU  
100% COLOR BARS  
TOP  
config / inputs  
75% COLOR BARS  
HORIZ TIMING  
MULTIPULSE  
PULSE & BAR  
CHR KEY TEST  
H RAMP  
TEST SIGNAL  
WALKING BITS  
100% COLOR BARS  
75% COLOR BARS  
HORIZ TIMING  
MULTIPULSE  
BOTTOM  
TEST SIGNAL  
PULSE & BAR  
CHR KEY TEST  
H RAMP  
WALKING BITS  
ANLG VIDEO ANLG KEY AANNLLGG IINNPPUUTT  
INPUTS > INPUTS >  
TTIIMMIINNGG >>  
MAP  
INPUTS >  
CHR KEY  
INPUTS >  
GPI  
INPUTS >  
1. Press MAP INPUTS to select the format (shaped or unshaped)  
for each video/ key input.  
From the map inputs menu, press name xpt button to name  
each crosspoint (up to nine letters may be used).  
2. Press CHR KEY INPUTS to define format and setup for the two  
optional Chroma Key analog inputs. (Menu will depend on  
setting of FIELD RATE switch on the Sync Generator Module  
in Cell A10 of the switcher frame).  
3. Press GPI INPUTS to program up to eight GPI inputs to trigger  
Model 2200 functions, such as E-MEM registers.  
4. Use the top and bottom soft knobs to select the test pattern  
signal for the top and bottom of the screen.  
Press exit to return to the Configuration menu.  
3-23  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Map Inputs Menu  
From the Inputs menu, press the MAP INPUTS> button to select the  
Map Inputs menu. This menu selects which physical input (input  
connection on frame) is used as a video, key, or chroma key on  
each crosspoint.  
MAP INPUTS MENU  
VIDEO INPUT  
= 4  
config/inputs/map inputs  
(DIG SER/RGB/SETUP)  
KEY INPUT  
= 1  
(DIG SER/8 BIT/SETUP/SYNC)  
XPT BUTTON XPT BUTTON  
NUMBER  
NAME  
CHROMA KEY INPUT  
= NONE  
38  
(INTERNAL)  
(SHIFT-14)  
UNSHAPED  
VIDEO  
Use the Preset Bus to select button number.  
SHAPED  
VIDEO  
LOG CHANNEL  
PHYS CHANNEL  
VIDEO/  
KEY FMT  
NAME XPT  
BUTTON >  
LOG/PHYS  
ASSIGNMENT  
1. On the M/ E 2 B Bus, press the crosspoint button whose  
sources you wish to select.  
2. With the log/phy assignment button, select phys inputs.  
3. Use the appropriate soft knob to select the desired type of  
input. Note that inputs formats are displayed when selecting  
input type.  
NOTE: Undefined buttons default to black.  
3-24  
   
Inputs Menu  
4. If mapping a chroma key input, use the chroma key input soft  
knob to assign the chroma key type for the currently selected  
crosspoint button.  
5. Use the video/key fmt button to assign whether the input will  
use the shaped video or unshaped video format.  
6. Refer to “DPM Map Aux Bus menu” under “DPM Setup,” in  
this section, for use of the log channel function of the log/phy  
assignment button.  
7. After mapping the input, you may name the crosspoint by  
pressing name xpt button>. The Name Xpt Button menu  
appears as shown next.  
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for all inputs.  
Press the EXIT button to return to the Inputs menu.  
3-25  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Name Crosspoint Button Menu  
From the Map Inputs menu, select NAME XPT BUTTON> to display  
the Name Crosspoint Button menu.  
NAME XPT BUTTON MENU  
space  
'
(
)
-
/
*
:
.
config/inputs/map inputs/name xpt button  
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
String Register  
Camera  
Save  
String  
Get  
String  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z  
XPT BUTTON NUMBER  
Button Name  
Cam 2  
38  
(SHIFT- 14)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Use the Preset Bus to select button number.  
Character =  
G
CURSOR  
BACK  
ACCEPT  
CHAR  
CURSOR  
FORWRD  
DELETE  
CHAR  
SAVE  
STRING  
GET  
STRING  
ACCEPT  
NAME  
1. Move the cursor with the Cursor Back and Cursor Forward  
buttons  
2. Select each character by turning the soft knobs. Use the  
ACCEPT CHAR button to accept the new character. Up to 9  
characters may be used.  
3. Press ACCEPT NAME to store the name. The system  
automatically returns to the Map Inputs menu.  
The first four characters of the name will appear in the display  
panel located between the two M/ Es.  
4. Save String moves the name into the string register Get String  
moves the string into the button name.  
The string register is a holding place which allows the button  
name to be changed or recalled easily.  
Press exit to return to the Inputs menu.  
3-26  
   
Inputs Menu  
Chroma Key Inputs Menu  
From the Inputs menu, press the CHR KEY INPUTS > button to  
select the Chroma Key Inputs menu; if optional Chroma Keyer is  
installed.  
CHROMA KEY INPUTS MENU  
config/inputs/chr key inputs  
COARSE  
TIMING = 24.25 CLOCKS  
=(24.250 µsecs)  
FINE  
RGB  
BETA  
YUV  
M II  
OFF  
ON  
INPUT  
1
INPUT  
2
INPUT  
3
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
5
INPUT  
6
SETUP  
INPUT  
FORMAT  
1. Select the chroma key input to adjust by pressing the INPUT 1  
or iNPUT 2 button.  
2. Select the correct format for that input using the INPUT  
FORMAT and setup buttons.  
NOTE: When the input is set to YUV the setup button will not appear.  
3. Adjust the coarse and fine timing for each chroma key input.  
the range of the (coarse) soft knob is -256 clocks to +256 clocks  
(1 clock = 69.84 nsecs). Use the fine soft knob to adjust the  
factional value from.000 to 0.999 clocks.  
Press exit to return to the Inputs menu.  
3-27  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
GPI Inputs Menu  
From the Inputs menu, press the gpi inputs> button to select the  
GPI Inputs menu.  
Eight GPI inputs are provided. All of these accept pulse-type  
inputs except Aux Tally Back, which is level-sensitive. Use the  
GPI Inputs menu to set GPI assignments for signals that can be  
used to trigger Model 2200 functions. These assignments must  
correspond to the physical GPI connections described in the  
Installation section of the Model 2200 Installation and Service  
Manual.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
GPI INPUTS MENU  
config/inputs/gpi in  
(AUTO TRANS)  
M/E 2  
M/E 2  
M/E 1  
AUTO TRAN PST BLACK  
AUTO TRAN  
GPI 1  
GPI 2  
GPI 3  
GPI 4  
GPI 5  
GPI 6  
GPI 7  
GPI 8  
M/E 1 AUTO TRAN  
GPI DISABLED  
GPI DISABLED  
GPI DISABLED  
GPI DISABLED  
GPI DISABLED  
GPI DISABLED  
GPI DISABLED  
When the desired function is selected,  
press PROGRAM GPI button to set the  
selected GPI input to the  
selected function.  
Choose from these 6 buttons to select various  
categories of GPI functions. Then use the  
FUNCTION SELECT knob to select a function.  
M/E 1  
AUTO TRAN ?  
GPI 1  
GPI  
SELECT  
KF  
EFFECT  
AUTO  
TRANS  
FRAME  
STORE  
PROGRAM  
GPI  
MISC  
CUT  
E-MEM  
The types of GPI assignments currently available are  
Miscellaneous (Aux Tallies), Keyframe Effects, Auto Transitions,  
Cuts, E-MEM registers, and Frame Store as indicated by the  
button labels at the bottom for the display window. One of these  
functions is always selected. The selected function is indicated in  
parentheses under the function select knob label.  
1. To assign the GPI inputs, first press gpi select to select the  
desired input.  
3-28  
   
Inputs Menu  
2. Select the type of category to be assigned (Misc, Keyframe  
Effects, etc.) by pressing the appropriate soft button.  
3. Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to assign a specific function  
(Aux Tally, etc.).  
4. After the desired function has been selected for each GPI,  
press program gpi to enter the selection, which is indicated in  
the display table.  
The following categories are available for assignment:  
MISC — Enables selection of the Aux Tally Back function, or  
allows the selected GPI input to be disabled.  
AUXTALLY — Allows an external device to control the aux bus  
tally level (high or low). The AUX BUS soft knob selects the  
appropriate aux bus.  
DISABLE GPI — Causes any signal applied to the selected GPI  
input to be ignored.  
kf effect — Enables selection of the Keyframe GPI function.  
The following transitions may be triggered with GPI pulses:  
run, rewind, auto run, and reverse  
AUTO TRANS — Enables selection of the Auto Transition GPI  
function. The following transitions may be triggered with GPI  
pulses:  
M/E 1, M/E 2, and M/e 2 PST BLK  
CUT — Enables selection of the Cut GPI function. The following  
cuts may be triggered by the GPI:  
M/E 1, and M/E 2  
E-MEM — Enables selection of the E-MEM GPI function. The  
following E-MEM functions may be triggered by the GPI:  
RECALL ME 1, RECALL ME 2, RECALL MSTR, AUTO  
RECALL, EFX DISSOLV, and SEQUENCE. The REGISTER  
soft knob selects the register for E-MEM recalls.  
FRAME STORE — Enables selection of the Frame Store GPI  
function. Triggerable functions are as follows:  
VIDEO GRAB, KEY GRAB, and MASK GRAB  
Press exit twice to return to the Configuration Menu.  
3-29  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Outputs Menu  
Select OUTPUTS> from the Configuration Menu. The Outputs  
Menu shown below displays.  
OUTPUTS MENU  
config/outputs  
M/E1 PGM  
BOTH  
PEAK  
PEAK  
M/E2 PGM  
PEAK WHITE  
OFF  
PEAK WHITE  
PEAK BLACK  
OFF  
M/E 1 PGM  
BOTH  
PEAK  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
LUM  
LIMITER  
CHROM  
LIMITER  
1. Select the desired output with the OUTPUT SELECT button.  
2. With the LUM LIMITER button choose one of the following  
luminance limiting conditions (does not apply to reentries):  
PEAK WHITE — the luminance level is limited at peak white  
PEAK BLACK — the luminance level is limited at standard  
black  
BOTH — keeps the luminance levels between standard black  
and peak white  
OFF does not limit luminance levels  
3. Use the CHROMA LIMITER button to set the chrominance to the  
following conditions:  
PEAK — keeps the chrominance between 100% chroma  
saturation levels  
OFF — allows chrominance levels to vary between the full  
legal D1 limits  
Press EXIT to return to the Configuration menu.  
3-30  
   
External Interface Menu  
External Interface Menu  
From the Configuration menu, select EXTERN I/F> to bring up the  
External Interface menu:  
Parameters for external interfaces such as the editor, GPI, DPM  
interfaces, and other peripheral interfaces can be set through the  
External Interfaces menu.  
EXTERNAL INTERFACE MENU  
config/extern if  
EDITOR  
I/F>  
DPM  
I/F>  
PERIPHERAL  
I/F>  
GPI  
OUTPUTS>  
Press the EDITOR I/F> button to advance to the Editor Interface  
menu.  
Press the DPM I/F> button to advance to the DPM Interface menu.  
Press the PERIPH I/F> button to advance to the Peripheral Interface  
menu.  
Press the GPI Outputs> button to advance to the GPI Outputs  
menu.  
Press exit to return to the Configuration menu.  
3-31  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Editor Interface Menu  
From the External Interface menu press the EDITOR I/F> button to  
select the Editor Interface menu:  
EDITOR INTERFACE MENU  
SWITCHER ADDRESS  
= 30 hex  
config/extern if editor if  
2400  
4800  
9600  
ODD  
EVEN  
NONE  
19200  
38400  
BAUD  
PARITY  
1. Select the desired switcher editor port BAUD rate with the  
BAUD button. The choices are listed below:  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400 (Typical setting for Grass Valley editors.)  
2. Select the desired parity for the switcher editor port with the  
PARITY button. The choices are listed below:  
ODD (Typical setting for Grass Valley editors.)  
EVEN  
NONE  
Press the EXIT button to return to the External Interface menu.  
3-32  
   
External Interface Menu  
DPM Setup Menu  
From the External Interface Menu, press DPM I/F> to bring up the  
DPM Setup Menu.  
The DPM type, aux bus control, channel routing selection, effects  
send delay, and control delay for each of (up to) four DPM devices  
is indicated in the table in the display. The menu displayed  
references a Model 2200-2i integrated DPM system.  
DPM SETUP MENU  
config / extern if / dpm setup  
EFF SEND DELAY  
= 5 fields  
EFF SEND CONTROL  
E-MEM LEVELS  
DELAY  
DELAY  
DEVICE 1  
DEVICE 2  
DEVICE 3  
DEVICE 4  
INTERNAL  
NONE  
BOTH  
OFF  
5
2
2
2
6
0
0
0
CHAN 1, CHAN 2, GLOBAL and CAMERA  
DPM 2  
none (no E-MEM control)  
none (no E-MEM control)  
NONE  
OFF  
NONE  
OFF  
WARNING: Changing DPM TYPE may change  
channel routing, control devices and aux bus mapping.  
CONTROL DELAY  
= 6 fields  
KSCOPE  
KRYSTAL  
OTHER  
SWR IN  
SWR OUT  
BOTH  
NONE  
DEVICE 1  
INTERNAL  
OFF  
CHANNEL  
ROUTING  
DEVICE  
SELECT  
DPM  
TYPE  
DPM MAP  
AUX BUSES > INPUTS >  
DPM MAP  
NOTE: For information on assigning aux buses to DPMs, be sure to  
read “DPM Configurations” in the Startup section of the Model 2200  
User Guide.  
For Kaleidoscope:  
1. Set the DPM TYPE to KSCOPE.  
2. Turn the EFF SEND DELAY soft knob to select 2 fields. It is  
important that this delay be set correctly.  
3-33  
     
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
3. Set the CONTROL DELAY to 6 fields  
4. PORT ASSIGN is set automatically to PORT A1. The baud rate  
for Port A1 is fixed at 307 Kbaud.  
5. Set CHANNEL ROUTING for BOTH or SWR IN, depending upon  
your system configuration, as described in “DPM  
Configurations” in the Model 2200 User Guide.  
6. Press the CPU Reset button through the hole in the door of the  
switcher frame.  
Communication should now be established between the Model  
2200 and Krystal.  
For Krystal:  
1. Set the DPM TYPE to KRYSTAL. The values denoted in Steps  
2 through 4 are set automatically.  
2. Turn the EFF SEND DELAY soft knob to select 5 fields. It is  
important to set this delay correctly.  
3. Turn the CONTROL DELAY soft knob to select 6 fields.  
4. PORT ASSIGN is set automatically to PORT A1. The baud rate  
for Port A1 is fixed at 307 K baud.  
5. Set CHANNEL ROUTING for BOTH or SWR IN, depending upon  
your system configuration, as described previously under  
“DPM Configurations.”  
6. Reset the Control Processor in the Model 2200 Signal  
Processor frame. This is done by opening the front door of the  
Processor and pressing the RESET button located near the  
top of the Control Processor module.  
Communication should now be established between the Model  
2200 and Krystal.  
3-34  
   
External Interface Menu  
For a DPM-700:  
1. Set the DPM TYPE to OTHER FIXED.  
2. Turn the EFF SEND DELAY soft knob to select 2 fields. It is  
important that this be set correctly.  
The CONTROL DELAY soft knob has no effect with the DPM-  
700.  
3. Set PORT ASSIGN to NONE.  
4. Set CHANNEL ROUTING to OFF.  
For devices which must be set up manually:  
1. Program all other required parameters  
2. Set EFF SEND DELAY to 0  
3. Select BLACK on the Aux Bus feeding the external device  
NOTE: A delay has been introduced when changing DPM TYPE. This  
delay allows a new DPM TYPE to be chosen without cycling through  
intermediate DPM Types. Once the desired solution has been made, the  
new DPM TYPE will be set 2 seconds later.  
4. Turn the M/ E Effects Send button on and off and look for a  
flash of the wrong video (BLACK) as Effects Send is turned  
on. (The flash will appear on the M/ E output for the Effects  
Send you selected.)  
5. Increase the EFF SEND DELAY one field at a time until there is  
no video flash when turning on Effects Send.  
NOTE: Increasing the EFF SEND DELAY any further will not change  
the Effects Send appearance. It will, however, delay the entry into Effects  
Send unnecessarily.  
3-35  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
DPM K’SCOPE Sources Menu  
The DPM KScope Sources Menu, shown below, allows you to  
map Kaleidoscope video source crosspoints to your switcher  
video source crosspoints. The first time you use this menu you  
must set user defaults. After setting defaults you can map  
crosspoints as required.  
Map Kaleidoscope video source crosspoints as follows:  
1. From the DPM Setup Menu, press DPM K’SCOPE SOURCES>  
to access the DPM KScope Sources Menu.  
2. Push SET DEFAULTS to set user defaults.  
3. Scroll the menu table selection fields with the KSCOPE  
BUTTON soft knob. Highlight the KScope button number you  
want to map.  
4. Use the SWITCHER BUTTON soft knob to set the desired  
switcher video source crosspoint to the Kaleidoscope video  
source crosspoint  
DPM K'SCOPE SOURCES MENU  
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm k'scope sources  
DIAL IN SWITCHER  
XPT BUTTON FOR  
K'SCOPE SOURCE  
BUTTON  
SWR BTN  
1
SWR BTN  
SWR BTN  
23  
K'SCOPE BTN  
K'SCOPE BTN  
11  
K'SCOPE BTN  
22  
12  
13  
14  
15  
0
1
2
23  
24  
25  
2
3
12  
13  
24  
S/1  
S/2  
S/3  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14  
15  
16  
16  
17  
18  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
4
5
6
7
8
S/4  
17  
18  
19  
20  
S/5  
19  
20  
21  
22  
ME/1  
ME/2  
PGM  
K'SCOPE BUTTON  
=
9
10  
11  
21  
10  
SWITCHER BUTTON  
=
SET  
DEFAULTS  
3-36  
   
External Interface Menu  
DPM Map Aux Buses Menu  
From the DPM Setup menu, press DPM MAP AUX BUSES> to  
access the DPM Map Aux Buses menu:  
NUMBER OF CHANNELS  
DPM MAP AUX BUSES MENU  
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map aux buses  
= 2  
Connection of physical AUX buses  
to physical channels  
CHANNEL 1  
= AUX 6  
MISC  
AUX 4  
AUX 5  
AUX 8  
-
-
-
-
-
CHAN 1 CHAN 2  
CHAN 3 CHAN 4 CHAN 5 CHAN 6 CHAN 7 CHAN 8  
DPM 1  
DPM 2  
DPM 3  
DPM 4  
AUX 1  
AUX 2  
AUX 3  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
AUX 6  
AUX 7  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DPM 2  
DEVICE  
SELECT  
The Aux bus-to-device assignment for each DPM device is shown  
in the table in the display.  
1. Select the desired device by pressing the DEVICE SELECT  
button  
2. For Kaleidoscope, rotate the NUMBER OF CHANNELS knob,  
assigning aux buses 1 through n to this device number. Note  
that a Kaleidoscope device (or other poolable DPM) does not  
allow you to select a starting aux bus number other than aux  
bus 1, and that all aux buses assigned to this Kaleidoscope  
must be in consecutive order.  
3-37  
     
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
3. For DPM 100 or 700 set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS and  
CHANNEL 1= soft knobs as appropriate for your installation.  
Assigning an aux bus to a DPM level saves the parameters under  
the DPM level rather than the MISC level for E-MEM operations.  
Kaleidoscope Connection Examples  
Some examples of connecting switcher(s) to Kaleidoscope are  
described next. See examples 1 and 2 below.  
Example 1: Switcher-to-Kaleidoscope Configuration  
Physical Channel  
A
B
C
Aux  
Bus  
1
2
D
E
Switcher  
F
Kaleidoscope  
Figure 3-3. Switcher-to-Kaleidoscope Cabling  
3-38  
External Interface Menu  
Example 2: Two Switchers-to-1 Kaleidoscope Configuration  
Physical  
Channel  
Aux  
Bus  
1
A
2
B
C
Switcher 1  
D
E
Aux  
Bus  
1
2
F
G
Switcher 2  
H
Kaleidoscope  
Figure 3-4. Switcher-to-Kaleidoscope Cabling  
3-39  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
The following menu shows how you might set up the DPM Map  
Aux Buses Menu for use with Kaleidoscope.  
NUMBER OF CHANNELS  
= 4  
DPM MAP AUX BUSES MENU  
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map aux buses  
Connection of physical AUX buses  
to physical channels  
FIRST CHANNEL  
= CHAN E  
-
-
MISC  
AUX 5  
AUX 6  
AUX 7  
-
-
-
PHYS CHAN  
CHAN A CHAN B CHAN C CHAN D CHAN E CHAN F CHAN G CHAN H  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DPM 1  
DPM 2  
DPM 3  
DPM 4  
AUX 1  
AUX 2  
AUX 3  
AUX 4  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DPM 1  
DEVICE  
SELECT  
Press the EXIT button to return to the DPM Setup menu.  
3-40  
External Interface Menu  
DPM Map Inputs Menu  
From the DPM Setup menu, press DPM MAP INPUTS> to bring up  
the DPM Map Inputs menu.  
VIDEO INPUT  
DPM MAP INPUTS MENU  
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map inputs  
= 19  
VIDEO INPUT KEY INPUT  
PHYSICAL  
CHAN 1-PRI  
CHAN 2  
LOGICAL  
6
19  
29  
-
23  
42  
63  
-
KEY INPUT  
= 42  
CHAN 3  
CHAN 4  
DPM 2  
CHAN 5  
-
-
CHAN 6  
-
-
CHAN 7  
-
-
SECONDARY  
-
-
DPM 1  
DPM 2  
DPM 3  
DPM 4  
CHAN 2  
DPM  
SELECT  
CHANNEL  
SELECT  
Set up the Kaleidoscope video and key return input numbers as  
follows:  
1. Select the desired device (1 through 4) by pressing the DPM  
SELECT button.  
2. Select the desired DPM channel by pressing the CHANNEL  
SELECT button.  
3-41  
     
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
3. Use the VIDEO INPUT knob to assign an input (1 - 32) to the  
Model 2200 physical channel to which the Kaleidoscope  
physical channel video return is connected.  
4. Use the KEY INPUT knob to assign an input (1 - 32) to the  
Model 2200 physical channel to which the Kaleidoscope  
physical channel video return is connected.  
5. Set up the aux bus format as described under the Aux Bus  
Format heading later in this section. Make sure that any aux  
buses assigned to Kaleidoscope are configured for KEY  
operation of their B aux buses.  
NOTE: It is not necessary to set the format for aux buses that are to be  
used for Effects Send. When Effects Send is selected, the B bus of each  
selected aux bus is automatically configured as a key.  
6. Press the exit button to return to the DPM Setup menu.  
7. Press EXIT again to return to the External Interface menu.  
3-42  
External Interface Menu  
Mapping DPM Returns  
Complete the DPM Setup by assigning the DPM channel returns.  
1. Bring up the Map Inputs menu by pressing the following  
buttons: Mixer CONFG, INPUTS>, MAP INPUTS>  
2. Press a crosspoint button on the M/ E 2 B background bus to  
select the crosspoint whose input mapping is to be changed.  
3. Select LOG CHANNEL with the LOG/PHYS ASSIGNMENT  
button.  
VIDEO INPUT  
DPM MAP INPUTS MENU  
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map inputs  
= 19  
VIDEO INPUT KEY INPUT  
PHYSICAL  
CHAN 1-PRI  
CHAN 2  
LOGICAL  
6
19  
29  
-
23  
42  
63  
-
KEY INPUT  
= 42  
CHAN 3  
CHAN 4  
DPM 2  
CHAN 5  
-
-
CHAN 6  
-
-
CHAN 7  
-
-
SECONDARY  
-
-
DPM 1  
DPM 2  
DPM 3  
DPM 4  
CHAN 2  
DPM  
SELECT  
CHANNEL  
SELECT  
4. Rotate the VIDEO INPUT knob to assign the desired DPM  
number and logical channel for this crosspoint. For example,  
assign logical channel 1 of DPM 1 by selecting  
DPM 1 LOG CHAN 1.  
5. Rotate the KEY INPUT knob to assign the desired DPM  
number and logical channel for this crosspoint. For example,  
assign logical channel 1 of DPM 1 by selecting DPM 1 LOG  
CHAN 1.  
3-43  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Press the CONFG button to return to the Configuration menu.  
Peripheral Interface Menu  
From the External Interface menu press Peripheral I/f> to bring up  
the Peripheral Interface menu.  
The Peripheral Interface Bus allows communications with  
external devices such as a GVG DPM 700 using Peripheral Bus II  
protocol. This menu indicates the settings of the baud and parity  
for the Peripheral PORT A3 on the Expanded Communications  
Module on the back of the frame.  
PERIPHERAL INTERFACE MENU  
config/extern if/peripheral if  
NOTE:  
The Peripheral Bus port is labelled  
"Port A3" on the rear of the frame  
electronics.  
2400  
4800  
9600  
ODD  
EVEN  
NONE  
19200  
38400  
BAUD  
PARITY  
PERIPHERAL  
TRIGGERS>  
3-44  
     
External Interface Menu  
1. Select the desired switcher peripheral port BAUD rate with  
the BAUD button. (For a DPM-700 set the baud rate to 38400  
and parity to NONE.) The choices are listed below:  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400  
2. Select the desired parity for the switcher peripheral port with  
the PARITY button. The choices are listed below:  
ODD  
EVEN  
NONE  
From the PERIPHERAL I/F menu select the PERIPHERAL  
TRIGGERS> button.  
3-45  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Peripheral Triggers Menu  
From the Peripheral Interface menu, press PERIPHERAL  
TRIGGERS> to open the Peripheral Triggers menu.  
PERIPHERAL TRIGGERS MENU  
config/extern if/peripheral if/peripheral triggers  
DEVICE NUMBER  
= 1  
DEVICE NO. FUNCTN NO.  
LEVEL  
-
A
B
C
D
1
1
1
4
DPM 1  
FUNCTION NUMBER  
= 4  
1
0
1
0
-
15  
E
F
-
0
-
-
<>LEVEL  
= DPM 1  
2
-
17  
3
G
H
1
-
15  
-
B
TRIGGER  
SELECT  
FIRE  
B
Use this menu to configure eight peripheral triggers for the  
switcher (designated A through H). Each trigger specifies what is  
to be done and is sent to a particular address (Device Number) on  
the Peripheral Bus. This menu also allows delegation of the trigger  
to the E-MEM level of misc or DPM 1 - DPM 4.  
Once configured, these triggers can be learned into E-MEM effects  
(on the MISc or dpm 1 - dpm 4 level) or fired directly from this  
menu (FIRE n. Refer to the Attach Peripheral Trigger Menu  
description in this manual for attaching peripheral triggers to  
E-MEM registers.  
1. Increment TRIGGER SELECT to select the designator to be  
assigned (A through H).  
2. Turn the DEVICE NUMBER soft knob to select the peripheral  
device to which that trigger will be sent.  
3-46  
 
External Interface Menu  
3. Turn the FUNCTION NUMBER soft knob to select the device  
function that will be triggered by a trigger message on the  
Peripheral II bus.  
The device functions for a DPM 700 depend on whether the DPM  
is operating in trigger mode, or E-MEM recall mode, as listed in  
Table 3-2.  
Table 3-2. . DPM 700 Functions  
Trigger DPM Trigger Function  
DPM E-MEM Recall  
0
Function not defined  
STOP  
Not valid  
1
DPM RECALL REGISTER 1  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 2  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 3  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 4  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 5  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 6  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 7  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 8  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 9  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 10  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 11  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 12  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 13  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 14  
DPM RECALL REGISTER 15  
2
RUN  
3
NEXT KEYFRAME  
PREVIOUS KEYFRAME  
STOP NEXT  
4
5
6
REVERSE  
7
REWIND  
8
KEYER AUTO-TRANS  
KEYER CUT  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
FADE TO BLACK AUTO-TRANS  
FADE TO BLACK CUT  
COMBINER AUTO-TRANS  
COMBINER CUT  
Function not defined  
Function not defined  
3-47  
 
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
4. Turn the Level soft knob to select which E-MEM level will  
activate this trigger.  
Press EXIT to return to the Peripheral Interface menu.  
Press EXIT again to return to the External Interface menu.  
GPI Outputs Menu  
From the External Interface menu press GPI Outputs to bring up  
the GPI Outputs menu.  
The GPI Outputs menu allows you to set which E-MEM Level  
each of the GPIs is assigned. The default condition is Misc. There  
is also provision for setting the length of the GPI signal.  
LENGTH  
= 1 Field  
GPI OUTPUTS MENU  
config / external if / gpi outputs  
LEVEL  
LENGTH  
1
1
1
2
3
4
MISC  
MISC  
MISC  
MISC  
1
1
5
6
MISC  
MISC  
MISC  
MISC  
1
1
1
OFF  
GPI 1  
GPI 2  
GPI 3  
GPI 4  
GPI 5  
GPI 6  
GPI 7  
GPI 8  
7
8
1
MISC  
DPM 1  
DPM 2  
DPM 3  
DPM 4  
7
PGM CUT  
TRIGGER  
SELECT  
GPI  
E-MEM  
LEVEL  
1. Select a GPI by pressing the Select GPI Button until the  
desired GPI number shows up in the window.  
2. Select the E-MEM level by pressing the E-MEM Level Button  
until the desired desired E-MEM Level is highlighted.  
3. Turn the Length knob to select the required GPI duration.  
3-48  
 
Aux Bus Format Menu  
4. Repeat for other GPIs.  
Press Exit to return the the External Interface Menu  
Press Exit to return the the Configuration Menu  
Aux Bus Format Menu  
From the Configuration menu, press the AUX BUS FORMAT>  
button to display the Aux Bus Format menu:  
There are five pairs of Aux Buses in the Model 2200, designated  
A1 through A5, and B1 through B5. Aux pairs one through four  
are not configurable (video/ key only). Aux bus pair five can be  
configured as video/ video or video/ key signals. In addition, Aux  
buses 1-4 (A and B) may be configured for either shaped or  
unshaped video output.  
AUX BUS FORMAT MENU  
config / aux bus format  
VIDEO  
KEY  
AUX  
BUS 5B  
AUX BUS  
SHAPING>  
The selection above the AUX BUS button indicates the  
format selected for the corresponding B bus.  
3-49  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
1. For the “5B” bus, select either VIDEO or KEY with the  
appropriate soft button.  
2. Press the AUX BUS SHAPING> button to select the Aux Bus  
Shaping menu.  
Press EXIT to return to the Peripheral Interface menu.  
Aux Bus Shaping Menu  
From the Aux Bus Format menu, press the AUX BUS Shaping>  
button to display the Aux Bus Shaping menu.  
The Aux Bus Shaping Menu allows you to select the output  
configuration to be always shaped or always unshaped on aux buses  
one and two. Thus the configuration should be set according to  
the input needs of the external device connected to the aux bus.  
The switcher then internally decides whether to turn on shaping  
or unshaping circuitry according to the nature of the video/ key  
pair feeding the aux bus.  
NOTE: The output shaped/unshaped selections for the Aux Buses apply  
only to the Aux 1 and Aux 2 outputs and only if the Effects Send option  
is present. Without the circuitry on the Effects Send module, the aux bus  
outputs simply pass whatever signal is present—either shaped or  
unshaped.  
1. Press the PHYS AUX SELECT button to select the physical aux  
bus to be used in the effects send loop.  
2. Set the VIDEO/KEY FMT selections for Aux Buses 1 and 2 to  
match the characteristic SHAPED or UNSHAPED expected by  
the external devices connected to those outputs. These  
settings control the states of the shapers and unshapers on the  
Aux Bus outputs.  
3-50  
   
Aux Bus Format Menu  
AUX BUS SHAPING MENU  
config / aux bus format / aux bus shaping  
PHYSICAL  
AUX BUS 1  
LOGICAL  
AUX BUS 1  
ON  
AUX BUS 2 AUX BUS 2  
AUX BUS 3 AUX BUS 3  
AUX BUS 4 AUX BUS 4  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
AUX BUS 1  
OFF  
PHYS AUX  
SELECT  
UNSHAPER  
1. Press the PHYS AUX SELECT button to select the physical aux  
bus to be used.  
2. With the UNSHAPER button, select the format of the video  
output on the aux bus to match the input requirements of the  
device that is to use the signal: ON if the video is already  
shaped but the external device needs a full screen-sized  
picture, or OFF if the device can accept video that has already  
been processed by a key signal.  
3-51  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
The LOGICAL column indicates the logical aux bus being  
used. This may be different from the physical aux bus when  
the Model 2200 is connected to a Kaleidoscope or other DPM  
that is able to control the aux buses. (This column is  
informational only. You can not change it from this menu.)  
NOTE: Since the process of unshaping the video signal results in  
dividing the video signal by its key, level errors, especially around black,  
may produce extreme signal levels where the key is at or near zero.  
Kaleidoscope ignores these extraneous signals, but they may cause  
problems with external sync separators or clamps. Therefore, it is  
recommended that connections to Kaleidoscope inputs be made directly  
from the 2200 Aux Bus outputs.  
When the Effects Send option is not present, the VIDEO/KEY FMT  
selections are not visible in the menu.  
This is the end of the Configuration menu and the end of the  
switcher setup. The following menus are used by the operators to  
operate the switcher.  
3-52  
 
M/E Mode Menu  
M/E Mode Menu  
Press the M/E Mode button at the left of the panel to display the  
M/ E Mode menu. Use the M/ E Mode menu to select Standard or  
Layered mode, and to turn Full Additive Mix mode on or off on  
an M/ E-by-M/ E basis.  
KEY 1 OPACITY  
= 100.00%  
M/E MODE MENU  
me mode  
KEY 2 OPACITY  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
STANDARD  
LAYERED  
OFF  
= 100.00%  
ON  
KEY A OPACITY  
= 100.00%  
LAYERED  
ON  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
KEY B OPACITY  
= 100.00%  
STANDARD  
OFF  
M/E  
SELECT  
M/E  
MODE  
FULL  
ADD MIX  
M/E  
COPY >  
The following menu selections are accessible through the M/ E  
Mode menu:  
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E system to be adjusted.  
M/E MODE — Sets the selected M/ E to either Layered mode or  
Standard mode. In Layered mode, the A and B buses function as  
keyers rather than background buses. In Standard mode, the A  
and B buses function as background buses.  
FULL ADD MIX — Enables or disables the FAM mode when in  
Layered mode. When FAM is on, the opacity of each layer is  
adjustable with a soft knob.  
M/E COPY> — Opens the M/ E Copy menu.  
3-53  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
M/E Copy Menu  
From the M/ E Mode menu, press the M/E copy> button to display  
the M/ E Copy menu. This menu allows you to copy or swap all  
M/ E settings between M/ Es.  
M/E COPY MENU  
me mode / me copy  
COPY  
M/E 1  
M/E 1  
TO  
M/E 2  
M/E 2  
SWAP  
WITH  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
FROM  
M/E  
TO  
M/E  
DO M/E  
SWAP  
DO M/E  
COPY  
The M/ E Copy menu selections are:  
FROM M/E Selects the M/ E system to copy or swap from.  
TO M/E Selects the M/ E system to copy or swap to.  
DO M/E SWAP Initiates the M/ E swap currently selected.  
DO M/E COPY Initiates the M/ E copy currently selected.  
NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap  
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting  
the menu in order to take effect.  
Press exit to return to the M/ E Mode menu.  
3-54  
     
Status Menu  
Status Menu  
Press the Status button at the left of the panel to display the Status  
menu. Use the Status menu to get information about the current  
software version number.  
STATUS MENU  
status  
SYSTEM  
LOG>  
INSTALL  
INFO >  
DIAGS >  
The Status menu selections are:  
System Log> — Opens the log of system errors.  
INSTALL INFO > — Opens the Install Info Status menu, which  
displays the version of the software installed.  
DIAGS > — Opens the Diagnostics menu. This menu is not  
installed at this time.  
3-55  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Installation Information Menu  
From the Status menu select install info> to see the currently  
installed switcher software.  
INSTALLATION INFO MENU  
/status/install_info  
MODEL 2200 SOFTWARE VERSION: 5.1  
Press exit to return to the Status menu.  
3-56  
     
Status Menu  
System Log Menu  
The system log is intended mainly for use by GVG personnel for  
fault identification. GVG may ask customers to search the log for  
a specific message, or ask customers to read back the last few  
messages. This information can help in isolating a fault or  
discovering a software bug.  
The contents of the system log do not necessarily indicate a  
problem with the switcher. Routine information and warning  
messages normally appear in the log. Normally, switcher  
operation is not affected by events that generate log messages.  
The log can contain messages from before a system reset or power  
up. This may allow GVG personnel to debug a problem if an error  
was logged prior to the system locking up.  
Each time the system is reset, a special message is entered in the  
log indicating the time of the reset. These messages tend to  
separate sections of the log.  
SYSTEM LOG MENU  
- - - - - - MESSAGE LOG CLEARED BY USER AT 15:57:24 ON JAN 5 1995  
SCROLL  
PAGE  
UP  
PAGE  
DOWN  
FIRST  
PAGE  
LAST  
PAGE  
LAST  
RESET  
CLEAR  
LOG  
3-57  
 
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
The System Log menu selections are:  
The PAGE UP and PAGE D OWN buttons allow you to scroll up  
and down the log on page at a time.  
PAGE UP,PAGE DOWN, FIRST PAGE, LAST PAGE — Use these  
page scrolling buttons as required to view the desired  
messages.  
If you press the FIRST PAGE button, the beginning of the log  
displays.  
If you press the LAST PAGE button, the most recently logged  
messages will display. This is often the most useful button to  
press for fault determination. (This button is not available  
when you are already displaying the last page.)  
The SCROLL soft knob allows you to scroll up or down the  
screen one line at a time.  
CLEAR LOG — Erase all current error messages.  
The LAST RESET button (System Log Menu) brings the first  
message after the last system power up or reset to the top of  
the display.  
There may be no SYSTEM RESET message in the log because:  
Someone cleared the log (CLEAR LOG button). In this  
case, a “MESSAGE LOG CLEARED BY USER AT...”  
message will be the first entry in the log.  
The message log overflowed. Only the most recent  
messages are retained if an overflow occurs, so the  
SYSTEM RESET message may not be present.  
3-58  
Keyer Menu  
Keyer Menu  
Press the keyer button to select the Keyer menu. This menu is used  
to make key characteristic adjustments that are not available on  
the control panel. The statuses of these characteristics are  
displayed on each key bus of the selected M/ E. (Only Key 1 and  
Key 2 are shown when in Standard mode.)  
KEYER MENU  
keyer  
OPACITY  
= 100.00%  
KEY 1  
OFF  
HORIZ KEY POSITION  
= 0.00 clocks  
KEY 2  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
M/E 1  
KEY A  
KEY B  
ON  
OFF  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
KEY 1  
AUTO  
M/E  
SELECT  
KEYER  
SELECT  
KEYER  
COPY >  
VIDEO  
CALIBRATE PROCESS >  
KEY 1  
NAM >  
SHAPING  
3-59  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
The following selections are accessible through the Keyer menu:  
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E to be adjusted.  
KEYER SELECT — Selects the keyer to be adjusted.  
SHAPING — Forces shaped ON or unshaped OFF video for the  
selected key bus, regardless of the current Configuration menu  
setting, or allows the current Configuration setting to apply AUTO.  
OPACITY — Adjusts the opacity of the selected key.  
HORIZ KEY POSITION — Adjusts the horizontal position of the  
selected key.  
KEYER COPY> — Opens the Keyer Copy menu to allow keyer  
parameters to be copied from one keyer to another.  
CALIBRATE — Resets all functions that turn on the Source Select  
UNCAL lamp to their default values (includes CORING and  
OPACITY.  
VIDEO PROCESS> — Opens the Video Process menu, which  
allows adjustment of the luminance gain, chroma gain, and DC  
offset for the individual key bus selected.  
KEY 1 NAM> — Opens the Key 1 NAM menu, which allows non-  
additive mixing (NAMing) of Key 2 into Key 1 on the selected  
M/ E  
3-60  
Keyer Menu  
Keyer Copy Menu  
From the Keyer menu, press keyer copy> to select the Keyer Copy  
menu. This menu is used to copy keyer parameters from any  
keyer to another.  
KEYER COPY MENU  
keyer / keyer copy  
COPY  
M/E 1 KEY 2  
M/E 1 KEY 2  
TO  
M/E 2 KEY 2  
M/E 2 KEY 2  
SWAP  
WITH  
KEY 1  
KEY 1  
KEY 2  
KEY A  
KEY B  
KEY 2  
KEY A  
KEY B  
EXCLUDE  
INCLUDE  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
FROM  
GROUP  
FROM  
KEYER  
TO  
GROUP  
TO  
KEYER  
DO KEYER  
SWAP  
DO KEYER  
COPY  
WIPES  
FROM GROUP and FROM KEYER — Select the Keyer whose setup  
parameters are to be copied.  
WIPES — Allows you to include or exclude Wipe settings that  
may be associated with the selected keyers.  
TO GROUP and TO KEYER — Select the destination Keyer that is to  
receive the copied keyer setup.  
DO KEYER SWAP — Initiates the keyer Swap currently selected.  
DO KEYER COPY — Initiates the keyer Copy currently selected.  
NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap  
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting  
the menu in order to take effect.  
NOTE: If the destination Keyer has different parameters than the source  
Keyer, those parameters are set to default values in the destination Keyer.  
Press exit to return to the Keyer menu.  
3-61  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Video Process Menu  
From the Keyer menu, press video process> to select the Video  
Process menu. This menu is used to adjust luminance gain,  
chroma gain, and D.C. offset for the selected bus.  
LUM GAIN  
VIDEO PROCESS MENU  
keyer / video process  
= 1.00  
KEY 1  
KEY 2  
A
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
CHROMA GAIN  
= 1.00  
M/E 2  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
B
OFF  
DC OFFSET  
= 0.00 IRE  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
ON  
ON  
CORING  
= 7.50 IRE  
KEY 2  
OFF  
OFF  
M/E  
SELECT  
BUS  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
PROCESS  
RESTORE  
DEFAULTS  
CORING  
The Video Process menu selections are:  
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E to be adjusted.  
BUS SELECT — Selects the bus to be adjusted.  
3-62  
   
Keyer Menu  
VIDEO PROCESS — Enables or disables the Video Processing  
adjustments listed below for the selected bus.  
LUM GAIN — Sets luminance gain of the selected bus.  
CHROMA GAIN — Sets chroma gain of the selected bus.  
DC OFFSET — Sets D.C. offset of the selected bus.  
CORING — Enables or disables the coring function for linear keys  
on the selected key bus (applies only to Key 1 and Key 2 buses in  
Standard mode and A and B buses in Layered mode).  
CORING — Adjusts M/ E background video in key area to  
ensure that video is fully removed.  
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Restores default adjustments of the  
selected soft knob functions.  
Press exit to return to the Keyer menu.  
Key 1 NAM Menu  
From the Keyer menu, press key 1 nam> to select the Key 1 Nam  
menu. This menu is used for NAMing Key 2 into Key 1. NAM  
stands for Non-Additive Mix. Refer to to the Glossary in this  
manual for a NAM definition.  
3-63  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
NAM SOFTNESS  
= 0%  
KEY 1 NAM MENU  
keyer / key 1 nam  
NAM OFFSET  
= 50%  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
KEY 1  
KEY 1  
ON  
OFF  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
ON  
OFF  
M/E  
SELECT  
NAM K2  
INTO K1  
RESTORE  
DEFAULTS  
Selections in the Key 1 NAM menu are as follows:  
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E to be set.  
NAM K2 INTO K1 — Enables or disables NAMing Key 2 into Key 1.  
When NAMing Key 2 into Key 1, Key 2 will be on the M/ E output  
but not indicated by a key ON indicator. (The crosspoint button  
tally will be correct.)  
Restore Defaults — Restores default conditions to selected M/ E.  
NAM SOFTNESS — Adjusts the video signal transition area  
between two video signals for the selected M/ E.  
NAM OFFSET — Set the transition level in the case where two or  
more video signals are present, the signal with the largest  
instantaneous amplitude is passed.  
Press exit to return to the Keyer menu.  
3-64  
 
Chroma Key Menu  
Chroma Key Menu  
Press the Chroma key button to select the Chroma Key menu. This  
menu is used to select and adjust a variety of chroma key  
parameters.  
FOREGROUND CORING  
CHROMA KEY MENU  
/chrKey  
= 7.50 IRE  
ME 1 KEY 1  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
FIXED  
SHADOW GAIN  
= 50%  
ME 1 KEY 2  
ME 2 KEY 1  
ME 2 KEY 2  
VARIABLE  
OFF  
SHADOW CLIP  
= 50%  
VARIABLE  
FIXED  
ON  
ON  
ME 2 KEY 1  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
CHR KEY FOREGROUND BACKGROUND FOREGROUND SECONDARY  
SELECT VIDEO VIDEO CORING COLOR >  
HUE  
MODS >  
KEY  
ADJUST >  
SETUP>  
The Chroma Key button selections are:  
CHR KEY SELECT — Selects the M/ E Keyer to be adjusted.  
FOREGROUND VIDEO — Turns the foreground on and off. When  
off, the foreground image is replaced with black.  
BACKGROUND VIDEO — Turns the background on and off. When  
on, the foreground image is a full raster image.  
3-65  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
FOREGROUND CORING — Turns foreground coring on and off.  
Coring replaces the key area of the background with black to  
ensure a clean key when background and fill are additively keyed  
together.  
VARIABLE provides a FOREGROUND CORING adjustment  
knob.  
FIXED provides a factory default foreground coring level.  
OFF must be selected to enable the Chroma Key panel BKGD  
SUPR LUM and CHROMA knobs.  
SHADOW GAIN — May be used to adjust the clip level of the  
Chroma Key shadow after the function has been turned on by  
the SHDW ON button on the Chroma Keyers subpanel.  
SHADOW CLIP — May be used to adjust the clip level of the  
Chroma Key shadow after the function has been turned on by  
the SHDW ON button on the Chroma Keyers subpanel.  
SECONDARY COLOR > — Opens the Secondary Color menu.  
Adjust the secondary color suppression angle, secondary color  
selectivity, and secondary chroma suppression level.  
HUE MODS > — Opens the Hue Modifications menu. Adjust the  
secondary hue angle, separate hue suppression, flare suppression,  
and flare suppression offset.  
KEY ADJUST > — Opens the CK Key Adjust menu. Adjust the  
chroma key position, width, and key softness.  
SETUP > — Opens the CK Setup menu. Chroma Key Auto Setup  
allows you to use the Positioner joystick to select the color to be  
suppressed.  
3-66  
Chroma Key Menu  
Chroma Key Secondary Color Menu  
From the Chroma Key menu, press the secondary color> button  
to select the Secondary Color menu. This menu is used to select  
and adjust secondary color suppression angle, selectivity, chroma  
and luminance suppression level and fringe control.  
CK SECONDARY COLOR MENU  
chr key/secondary color  
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS ANGLE  
370.0 degrees  
=
(0.0 degrees CW from Primary)  
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS SELECTIVITY  
= 50%  
OFF  
ME1 KEY 1  
ME1 KEY2  
ME2 KEY1  
ME2 KEY 2  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
SEC CHROMA/LUM SUPPRESS LEVEL  
= 30%  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
CHROMA  
LUMA  
FRINGE CONTROL  
= 30%  
ME2 KEY1  
OFF  
CHR KEY  
SELECT  
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS  
SEC AUTO  
SUPPRESS  
MODE  
SETUP  
3-67  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
The CK Secondary Color menu selections are:  
CHR KEY SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to be adjusted.  
SECONDARY COLOR SUPPRESS — Enables or disables secondary  
color suppress and the following soft knobs:  
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS ANGLE — Provides an offset  
adjustment to the primary chroma key hue setting.  
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS SELECTIVITY — Adjusts selectivity of  
the chroma key hue control.  
SEC CHROMA/LUMA SUPPRESS LEVEL CHROMA:  
Changes a second color in the foreground that may have been  
affected by the primary color suppression. For example, if the  
video set is a person with blond hair standing in front of a  
blue background, individual strands of the blond hair may  
appear bluish after suppressing the blue background. By  
adjusting the secondary chroma suppression level, you can  
adjust the hair color back to its normal blond. LUMA: Control  
the luma contribution of the background to the foreground  
part of the scene.  
FRINGE CONTROL — Use to restore color to the gray portions  
of the foreground color resulting from adjustments to the SEC  
CHROMA SUPPRESS LEVEL.  
SUPPRESS MODE — Suppresses either chroma or luma modes for  
the selected chroma key.  
Press exit to return to the Chroma Key menu.  
3-68  
Chroma Key Menu  
Chroma Key Hue Modifiers Menu  
From the Chroma Key menu, press the hue mods> button to select  
the Hue Modifiers menu. This menu is used to select and adjust  
hue selectivity and flare suppression.  
CK HUE MODIFIERS MENU  
/chr_key/hue_mods  
SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS ANGLE  
127 degrees  
=
(150.5 degrees CCW from Primary)  
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS  
ME1 KEY 1  
ME1 KEY2  
ME2 KEY1  
ME2 KEY 2  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
HIGH  
OFF  
=
75%  
ON  
HIGH  
MEDIUM  
LOW  
ON  
ON  
ME2 KEY1  
CHR KEY  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
FLARE  
SUPPRESS SUPPRESS  
FGD NOISE  
SEP HUE  
SUPPRESS  
SELECT  
The CK Hue Modifiers menu selections are:  
CHR KEY SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to be adjusted.  
SEP HUE SUPPRESS — Enables or disables suppression of the  
selected hue from background and foreground. Also enables or  
disables the SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS soft knob.  
SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS — Adjusts hue suppression  
applied to background and foreground.  
FLARE SUPPRESS — Enables or disables suppression of the  
selected hue from the foreground. Also enables or disables the  
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS soft knob.  
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS — Used to adjust the  
amount of foreground glare caused by a camera lens.  
3-69  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
FGD NOISE SUPPRESS — Corrects for color impurities in video  
tape. For example, if you are keying out blue in your source tape  
and the white on the tape is blue-shifted, you will also key out the  
white. The offset suppression adjustment allows you to change  
the origin of the suppression space, so that the blue-shifted white  
is not included in the suppression.  
Press exit to return to the Chroma Key menu.  
Chroma Key Adjust Menu  
From the Chroma Key menu, press the key adjust> button to select  
the Key Adjust menu. This menu is used to adjust the chroma key  
horizontal position, key width, and softness.  
KEY WIDTH  
= 1.0 CLOCKS  
(69.8 nsecs)  
CK ADJUST MENU  
/chr_key/key_adjust  
KEY SOFTNESS  
ME1 KEY1  
ME1 KEY2  
ME2 KEY1  
ME2 KEY2  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
= 50%  
ON  
ON  
ON  
HORIZ KEY POSITION  
= -2.0 CLOCKS  
(-139.6 nsec)  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ME2 KEY1  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
CHR KEY  
SELECT  
KEY  
WIDTH  
KEY  
SOFTNESS  
KEY  
POSITION  
FGD  
RESHAPE  
KEY  
S-SHAPING  
3-70  
   
Chroma Key Menu  
Chroma Key Adjust menu selections are:  
CHR KEY SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to be adjusted.  
KEY WIDTH — Enables or disables the KEY WIDTH soft knob.  
KEY WIDTH — Adjusts width of the chroma key.  
KEY SOFTNESS — Enables or disables the KEY SOFTNESS soft  
knob.  
KEY SOFTNESS — Use to adjust the foreground edges to the  
key cut into the background. When off, horizontal and  
vertical softness are forced to zero.  
KEY POSITION — Enables or disables the Horiz. Key Position soft  
knob.  
HORIZ KEY POSITION — Adjusts the horizontal position of the  
chroma key.  
FGD RESHAPING — When ON, causes the shaped fill out of the  
chroma keyer to be multiplied by the key signal out of the chroma  
keyer. Depending upon the picture(s), FGD RESHAPING may  
improve the appearance of the chroma key.  
KEY S-SHAPING — Enables an S-shape chroma compression  
function. Chroma compression helps remove slight  
transparencies in the foreground, and low-level noise in the  
background.  
Press exit to return to the Chroma Key menu.  
3-71  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Chroma Key Setup Menu  
From the Chroma Key menu, press the setup button to select the  
Key Setup menu. This menu is used to select a chroma key  
suppress color from a chroma key signal. Use the Positioner  
joystick to position the cursor on the color to be suppressed.  
CK SETUP MENU  
/chr_Key setup  
M/E 1 KEY 1  
M/E 1 KEY 2  
M/E 2 KEY 1  
MOVE POSITIONER TO THE MOST SATURATED BACKGROUND AREA,  
AND PRESS 'AUTO SETUP' AGAIN TO SUPPRESS THAT HUE.  
M/E 2 KEY 2  
M/E 2 KEY 1  
KEYER  
SELECT  
AUTO  
SETUP  
CANCEL  
The Chroma Key Setup menu selections are:  
KEYER SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to setup.  
AUTO SETUP — Use to begin or complete an Auto Setup session.  
Auto Setup mode is entered after you press the Auto Setup  
button. In this mode, use the Positioner to move the cursor  
displayed on the Preview monitor. Place the cursor on the color to  
be suppressed, then press the AUTO SETUP button again to  
complete; or press CANCEL to abort. Auto Setup mode will also be  
aborted if you exit the menu, or if the delegated keyer in not of the  
type CHROMA KEY.  
CANCEL — Use to abort an Auto Setup in progress.  
Press exit to return to the Chroma Key menu.  
3-72  
     
Wipe Menu  
Wipe Menu  
Press the wipe button to select the Wipe menu.  
WIPE MENU  
wipe  
WIPE  
MODS >  
WIPE  
COPY >  
PATTERN > TEXTURE >  
The following menu selections are accessible through the Wipe  
menu:  
PATTERN> — Opens the Wipe Pattern menu.  
TEXTURE> — Opens the Wipe Texture menu.  
WIPE MODS> — Opens the Wipe Modifiers menu.  
WIPE COPY> — Opens the Wipe Copy menu.  
3-73  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Wipe Pattern Menu  
From the Wipe menu, press the pattern> button to select the Wipe  
Pattern menu. This menu is used to assign a variety of wipe  
patterns to a selected wipe generator.  
PATTERN  
SELECT  
WIPE PATTERN MENU  
6
1
0
2
3
8
5
7
23  
4
9
11  
21  
14  
10  
13  
23  
33  
43  
53  
18  
12  
15  
25  
16  
17  
19  
24  
22  
28  
20  
30  
26  
27  
37  
29  
LRG  
SML  
RNDM RNDM  
38 39  
34  
35  
36  
32  
42  
31  
TEX-  
TURE  
45  
44  
41  
40  
46  
47 48  
49  
EXT  
52  
55  
56  
54  
50  
51  
58  
57  
M/E 1  
PRI  
M/E 1  
SEC  
M/E 2  
PRI  
M/E 2  
SEC  
M/E 1 PRI — Assigns the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the M/ E 1  
Primary Wipe Generator.  
M/E 1 SEC — Assigns the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the M/ E  
1 Secondary Wipe Generator.  
M/E 2 PRI — Assigns the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the M/ E 2  
Primary Wipe Generator.  
M/E 2 SEC — Assigns the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the M/ E  
2 Secondary Wipe Generator.  
PATTERN SELECT soft knob selects the pattern for the selected  
M/ E.  
NOTE: The Menu button in the wipe select area must be pressed for the  
selected pattern to be available to the M/E.  
3-74  
   
Wipe Menu  
Press exit to return to the Wipe menu.  
Wipe Texture Menu  
From the Wipe menu. press the texture> button to select the Wipe  
Texture menu. This menu is used to adjust the appearance of the  
video texture.  
WIPE TEXTURE MENU  
wipe / texture  
M/E 1 PRI  
M/E 1 SEC  
M/E 2 PRI  
M/E 2 SEC  
1:1  
1:1  
6:1  
2:1  
2:1  
FREE RUN  
2:1  
NONE  
NOTCH  
3
6
5
2
1
1
2
4
6
6
1
3
NOTCH  
SMOOTHING  
1:1  
1:1  
2:1  
3:1  
4:1  
6:1  
8:1  
1:1  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2:1  
4:1  
1
6:1  
SMOOTHING  
NOTCH  
2
3
4
8:1  
FREE RUN  
NONE  
M/E 2 PRI  
WIPE GEN  
SELECT  
HORIZ  
STRETCH  
VERT  
MODE  
FILTER  
MODE  
LENGTH  
A
LENGTH  
B
SOURCE  
The Wipe Texture menu selections are as follows for the selected  
wipe generator:  
HORIZ STRETCH — Selects one of the horizontal stretch ratios  
listed in the menu.  
VERT MODE — Selects one of the vertical stretch ratios listed in the  
menu.  
FILTER MODE — Selects one of the filtering modes listed in the  
menu.  
LENGTH A — Selects one of the lengths listed in the menu.  
3-75  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
LENGTH B — Selects one of the lengths listed in the menu.  
SOURCE — Selects one of the sources listed.  
Press exit to return to the Wipe menu.  
Wipe Modifiers Menu  
From the Wipe menu, press the wipe mods> button to select the  
Wipe Modifiers menu. This menu is used to assign several  
different wipe modifiers to each wipe generator.  
SPLIT OFFSET  
WIPE MODIFIERS MENU  
wipe / wipe mods  
= 0%  
ME 1 PRI  
ME 1 SEC  
ME 2 PRI  
ME 2 SEC  
MIX  
TEXTURE  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
TEXTURE  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
REVERSE  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
REVERSE  
MIX  
NAM -  
NAM+  
ON  
NAM -  
NAM+  
MIX  
TEXTURE  
NORMAL  
ON  
REVERSE  
NORMAL  
ME 2 PRI  
OFF  
WIPE GEN  
SELECT  
PTN MIX  
TYPE  
PTN MIX  
SOURCE  
SPLIT  
OFFSET  
PST PTN  
DIRECTION  
WIPE  
MODULATE >  
The Wipe Modifiers menu selections are as follows for the  
selected wipe generator:  
WIPE GEN SELECT — Selects the desired wipe generator.  
PTN MIX TYPE — Selects the type of pattern mix.  
3-76  
   
Wipe Menu  
PTN MIX SOURCE — Selects the pattern mix source.  
NORMAL — Selects a mix between the primary and secondary  
wipe generators. This selection is prohibited if the secondary  
wipe option is not installed.  
TEXTURE — Selects a mix between the texture pattern and the  
primary wipe generator.  
SPLIT OFFSET button — Enables or disables the split wipe offset  
function.  
SPLIT OFFSET soft knob — Adjusts the offset of split wipes.  
PST PTN DIRECTION — Selects the direction of the preset pattern  
for the selected wipe generator.  
WIPE MODULATE> — Opens the Wipe Modulation menu.  
Press exit to return to the Wipe menu.  
Wipe Modulation Menu  
From the Wipe Modifiers menu, press the wipe modulate>} button  
to select the Wipe Modulation menu. This menu is used to assign  
modulation characteristics to the wipe generators  
.
3-77  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
MODULATION AMPLITUDE  
= 50%  
WIPE MODULATION MENU  
wipe / wipe mods / wipe modulate  
M/E 1 PRI  
M/E 1 SEC  
M/E 2 PRI  
M/E 2 SEC  
HORIZ  
VERT  
HORIZ  
LOCK  
SINE  
SINE  
MODULATION FREQUENCY  
= 0.50 cycles/screen  
SINE  
TRIANGLE  
LOCK  
HORIZ  
VERT  
OFF  
TRIANGLE  
SINE  
M/E 2 PRI  
WIPE GEN  
SELECT  
MODULATE  
MODULATE WAVEFORM  
3-78  
Wipe Menu  
The Wipe Modulation menu selections are as follows for the  
selected wipe generator:  
WIPE GEN SELECT — Selects the desired wipe generator.  
MODULATE — Turns wipe modulation ON or OFF. When OFF, no  
other buttons or knobs on this menu are available.  
MODULATE WAVEFORM — Selects the modulation waveform,  
either TRIANGLE or SINE.  
MODULATION AMPLITUDE — Adjusts the amplitude of the  
modulation signal.  
MODULATION FREQUENCY — Adjusts the frequency of the  
modulation signal.  
Press exit to return to the Wipe Modifiers menu.  
Press exit again to return to the Wipe menu.  
3-79  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Wipe Copy Menu  
From the Wipe menu, press the wipe copy> button to select the  
Wipe Copy menu. This menu is used to copy or swap Primary  
(PRI) or Secondary (SEC) wipe generator settings between M/ Es  
WIPE COPY MENU  
wipe / wipe copy  
COPY  
SWAP  
M/E 1 PRI  
M/E 1 PRI  
TO  
M/E 2 PRI  
M/E 2 PRI  
WITH  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
PRI  
SEC  
PRI  
SEC  
FROM  
GROUP  
FROM  
WIPE GEN  
TO  
GROUP  
TO  
WIPE GEN  
DO WIPE  
SWAP  
DO WIPE  
COPY  
The Wipe Copy menu selections are as follows:  
FROM GROUP — Selects the M/ E to copy or swap from.  
FROM WIPE GEN — Selects either the PRI or SEC Wipe Generator  
to copy or swap from.  
TO GROUP — Selects the M/ E to copy or swap to.  
TO WIPE GEN — Selects either the PRI or SEC Wipe Generator to  
copy or swap to.  
DO WIPE SWAP — Initiates the wipe swap currently selected.  
DO WIPE COPY — Initiates the wipe copy currently selected.  
NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap  
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting  
the menu in order to take effect.  
Press exit to return to the Wipe menu.  
3-80  
     
E-MEM Menu  
E-MEM Menu  
Press the e-mem button to select the E-MEM menu. This menu is  
used to display the status of several parameters on all levels of the  
E-MEM register selected on the E-MEM panel, and sets up the  
switcher to inhibit crosspoint changes when E-MEM recalls are  
done.  
E-MEM MENU  
E-MEM  
E-MEM  
LEVEL  
REG  
ENABLE  
STATUS  
LOCK  
STATUS  
SEQ  
LINK  
SEQ  
DELAY  
KEYFRAMES  
USED  
AVAILABLE  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
07  
07  
07  
07  
07  
07  
07  
07  
ON  
ON  
08  
08  
08  
08  
08  
08  
08  
08  
000  
000  
698  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
698  
BKGD  
698  
MISC  
403  
CHAN 1  
CHAN 2  
GLOBAL  
CAMERA  
403  
403  
403  
397  
ENABLE  
DISABLE  
ENABLE  
DISABLE  
SOURCE  
HOLD>  
PERIPH  
DEVICES>  
RUN  
LEVER  
KEYFRAME  
EDITING  
KF  
PATH >  
GPI & PBUS  
TRIGGERS>  
REGISTER>  
3-81  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
The following selections are available under the E-MEM Menu:  
REGISTER> — Displays the E-MEM Register Menu.  
SOURCE HOLD> — Displays the Source Hold Menu.  
PERIPH DEVICES> — Displays the Peripheral Devices Menu.  
RUN LEVER — Enables or disables the Run lever arm to manually  
move the Time Cursor along the timeline and manually run  
keyframe effects. DISABLE may be used in a live situation to avoid  
problems that might arise from bumping the lever arm.  
KEYFRAME EDITING — Enables/ disables keyframe editing mode.  
This activates the effects editing buttons on the E-MEM panel,  
allowing multiple-keyframe effects to be built and modified.  
ENABLE — Enables keyframe editing mode, which activates  
the effects editing buttons on the E-MEM panel (low tally) and  
allows multiple-keyframe effects to be built and modified.  
DISABLE — Disables keyframe editing and turns off the  
effects editing buttons.  
KF PATHS> — Displays the Keyframe Paths Menu, which allows  
the type of path to be set for interpolation of parameters between  
keyframes.  
GPI & PBUS TRIGGERS — Displays the GPI and PBUS Trigger  
Menu.  
3-82  
E-MEM Menu  
E-MEM Register Menu  
From the E-MEM menu, press the register> button to select the E-  
MEM Register menu. This menu is used to lock and unlock  
registers, and to clear effects sequences.  
E-MEM REGISTER MENU  
E-MEM/register  
Current Bank: 5  
Current Register: 52  
CLEAR REG  
LOCK REG  
CLEAR SEQ  
LOCK  
ALL  
LOCK  
BANK  
LOCK  
REG  
SELECT  
SELECT — Enables either locking/ unlocking E-MEM registers or  
clearing sequences from registers.  
3-83  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
For CLEAR REG:  
CLEAR ALL — Clears all information for all 100 registers for all  
enabled levels. After CLEAR ALL is pressed, a submenu comes  
up to allow you to CONFIRM or CANCEL the operation.  
CLEAR BANK — Clears all information for all registers in the  
bank whose number is displayed in the menu for all enabled  
levels. After CLEAR BANK is pressed, a submenu displays  
with a CONFIRM or CANCEL choice.  
CLEAR REG — Clears all information for the register whose  
number is displayed in the menu for all enabled levels. After  
CLEAR REG is pressed, a submenu displays with a CONFIRM  
or CANCEL choice.  
3-84  
E-MEM Menu  
For LOCK REG:  
LOCK ALL, UNLOCK ALL — Locks or unlocks all 100 registers  
for all currently enabled “levels.” (Levels are enabled with the  
Enable buttons on the E-MEM panel - for a definition of levels,  
refer to Enable Buttons, Effects Memory Subpanel, this  
section.) If any registers are unlocked, a LOCK ALL selection is  
displayed; if any or all registers are locked, an UNLOCK ALL  
selection is displayed.  
LOCK BANK, UNLOCK BANK — Locks or unlocks all registers  
in the currently displayed bank and register for all currently  
enabled levels. Note that the current bank displayed may not  
be the same as the current bank for independent E-MEM  
levels. If that is the case, the current bank will not get locked  
on those levels, but the selected bank will.  
If any currently enabled E-MEM level has an unlocked  
register in the bank, a LOCK BANK instruction is displayed for  
the currently displayed bank number. When all registers in  
the bank are locked, an UNLOCK BANK instruction is  
displayed.  
LOCK REG, UNLOCK REG — Locks the register whose number  
is displayed in the menu for all currently enabled levels. Note  
that this may not be the current register for some levels. If that  
is the case, the current register will not get locked on those  
levels, but the selected register will.  
If any currently enabled E-MEM register level is unlocked, a  
LOCK REG instruction is displayed for the currently displayed  
register number. When all of the enabled E-MEM register  
levels are locked, an UNLOCK REG instruction is displayed.  
3-85  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
For CLEAR SEQ:  
CLEAR ALL — Clears only sequence information for all 100  
registers for all enabled levels. After CLEAR ALL is pressed, a  
submenu comes up to allow you to CONFIRM or CANCEL the  
operation.  
CLEAR BANK — Clears only sequence information for all  
registers in the bank whose number is displayed in the menu  
for all enabled levels. After CLEAR BANK is pressed, a  
submenu displays with a CONFIRM or CANCEL choice.  
CLEAR REG — Clears only sequence information for the  
register whose number is displayed in the menu for all  
enabled levels. After CLEAR REG is pressed, a submenu  
displays with a CONFIRM or CANCEL choice.  
Press exit to return to the E-MEM menu.  
3-86  
E-MEM Menu  
Source Hold Menu  
From the E-MEM menu, press the source hold> button to select  
the Source Hold menu. This menu is used to inhibit crosspoint  
changes on individual buses during E-MEM recalls.  
BUS  
= ME 1 A  
SOURCE HOLD MENU  
E-MEM/source hold  
BUS  
ME 1 A  
ME 2 A  
PGM  
BUS  
HOLD  
BUS  
BUS  
HOLD  
HOLD  
HOLD  
HOLD  
ME 1 B  
ME 2 B  
PST  
-
-
-
-
-
-
ME 1 K1  
ME 2 K1  
DSK 1  
AUX 1  
AUX 5  
AUX 9  
-
-
-
-
ME 1 K2  
ME 2 K2  
DSK 2  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PVW  
MASK  
AUX 4  
AUX 8  
AUX 2  
AUX 3  
AUX 7  
-
-
AUX 6  
-
-
ON  
Menu changes delegated E-MEMs only.  
OFF  
CLEAR ALL  
HOLDS  
ALL  
HOLD  
SOURCE  
HOLD  
BUS = ... soft knob — Selects the bus to which the source hold is  
to be applied.  
CLEAR ALL OFF — Clears all Source Holds.  
ALL Hold — Sets all Source Holds.  
SOURCE HOLD — Enables or disables the Source Hold feature on  
the selected bus. When ON, all crosspoints (video and key) on the  
bus are held; that is, the state of the crosspoints does not change  
when E-MEM recalls are done.  
Press exit to return to the E-MEM menu.  
3-87  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Peripheral Devices Menu  
From the E-MEM menu, press the periph devices> button to select  
the Peripheral menu. This menu is used to select the peripheral  
devices you want included in E-MEM learns and recalls.  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES MENU  
E-MEM/periph devices  
Set the peripheral  
devices which are  
to be affected by  
E-MEM Learn and  
Recall operations.  
DEVICE NO.  
DEVICE NO.  
STATE  
OFF  
ON  
DEVICE NO.  
8
STATE  
OFF  
STATE  
OFF  
0
1
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
9
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
2
3
4
5
6
7
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
DEVICE NUMBER  
= 1  
ON  
<>  
OFF  
CLEAR ALL  
OFF  
SET ALL  
ON  
DEVICE  
1
CLEAR ALL OFF — Turns OFF learn and recall operations to all  
devices on the peripheral bus.  
SET ALL ON — Turns ON learn and recall operations to all devices  
connected to the peripheral bus.  
DEVICE Number= ... soft knob — Selects the Device Number to be  
turned ON or OFF with regard to E-MEM learn and recall  
operations.  
DEVICE ... — Turns ON or OFF learn and recall operations to the  
selected device.  
Press exit to return to the E-MEM menu.  
3-88  
     
E-MEM Menu  
Keyframe Path Menu  
From the Keyframe Menu, press the kf paths> button to display  
the Keyframe Path Menu. This menu is used to set the type of path  
for interpolation of parameters between keyframes.  
KEYFRAME PATH MENU  
E-MEM / kf path  
Register: 52 Keyframe: 2  
TRANSITION S-LINEAR  
KEY 1  
KEY 2  
KEY A  
KEY B  
WIPES  
LINEAR  
S-LINEAR  
HOLD  
HOLD  
S-LINEAR  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
WIPEXFORM S-LINEAR  
ALL  
MISC  
BKGD  
CHAN 1  
CHAN 2  
GLOBAL  
HOLD  
ON  
LINEAR  
OFF  
S-LINEAR  
TRANSITION  
CAMERA  
SELECT  
LEVEL  
PAUSE  
SELECT  
GROUP  
PATH  
TYPE  
LEVEL SELECT and GROUP SELECT — Select the register level  
and the functional group to which the path type is to be applied.  
Each functional group of each keyframe can have its own path  
type. When ALL is selected, the same path type can be applied to  
all functional groups simultaneously.  
PATH TYPE — Selects the algorithm to be used for interpolating  
between keyframes for the selected group. The available path  
types are Linear, S-Linear, and Hold.  
LINEAR — Causes a constant change in parameter values  
between keyframes, with no acceleration or deceleration.  
S-LINEAR — Causes the change to each parameter to begin  
slowly as it leaves the starting keyframe, to move faster  
through the midrange of the keyframe duration, then to  
decelerate as it approaches the destination keyframe.  
3-89  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
CURVE — Provides three knobs to control the three  
parameters of the path vector: TENSION, CONTINUITY, and  
BIAS. These knobs act on the vector parameters to adjust the  
path into (entry) and out of (exit) the keyframe. The path  
through KF2 is parallel with an imaginary line drawn  
between KF1 and KF2.  
TENSION — Controls the length of the tension vector. At  
a setting of 0, the imaginary line extends an equal distance  
into and out of the keyframe, and the path through the  
middle keyframe is curved. At 1.00, the Tension vector is  
shortened to non-existence through KF2. At -1.00, the  
effect is a lengthening of the Tension vector, causing the  
path through the middle keyframe to be longer and  
broader.  
CONTINUITY — Determines the angle of the path into and  
out of the keyframe. At 1.00, the effect is that of motion  
dropping into and then out of the keyframe, similar to a  
bouncing ball. At -1.00, the paths between the keyframes  
become straight lines, accelerating through the keyframe.  
BIAS — Determines whether the path will be “pulled”  
towards the previous or the following keyframe. At 0, the  
curve through the keyframe is gentle. At 1.00, the path is  
pulled towards the previous keyframe. Entrance and exit  
to the keyframe are on a straight line from the previous  
keyframe, and the path of the effect travels completely  
through KF2 before turning towards KF3. At -1.00, the  
path is pulled towards the following keyframe. Entrance  
and exit to the keyframe are a straight line pointed to the  
following keyframe.  
HOLD — Causes all parameters to hold at their starting values  
throughout the keyframe duration. All changes occur at the  
end of the keyframe duration, with no interpolation between  
keyframes.  
Press exit to return to the Keyframe menu.  
3-90  
E-MEM Menu  
GPI and PBUS TRIGGERS Menu  
From the E-MEM Menu, press the KF TRIGGERS> button to  
display the GPI and PBUS Triggers Menu. This menu is used to  
attach GPI triggers or peripheral triggers to E-MEM registers so  
that the triggers will fire when the registers are recalled. The  
triggers may be tested after setting them up.  
GPI & PBUS TRIGGERS MENU  
E-MEM / gpi & pbus triggers  
Effect:  
Keyframe:  
PERIPHERAL TRIGGERS (PBUS 2)  
GPI OUTPUT TRIGGERS  
E-MEM LEVEL  
E-MEM LEVEL  
DEVICE  
FUNCTION  
-
-
-
-
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
-
6
-
1
6
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
G
H
MISC  
OFF  
MISC  
OFF  
A
1
SELECT  
PERIPH  
ATTACH  
PERIPH  
FIRE  
A
FIRE  
ATTACHED  
SELECT  
GPI  
ATTACH  
GPI  
FIRE  
1
FIRE  
ATTACHED  
SELECT GPI — Selects the GPI Output (1 through 8) to which you  
may attach an E-MEM recall trigger. The trigger numbers  
correspond to the physical connections made to the GPI Output  
connectors on the rear of the switcher frame.  
ATTACH — Attaches the selected trigger to the indicated E-MEM  
register ON, or turns the trigger OFF.  
FIRE GPI — Test fire the selected (highlighted) GPI.  
FIRE ATTACHED — Test fire all attached GPIs (set to ON)  
simultaneously, regardless of what is currently selected.  
Press exit to return to the E-MEM Menu.  
3-91  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
TRIGGER SELECT — Selects the Peripheral trigger (A through H)  
which you may attach to an E-MEM recall. The triggers are  
defined in the Peripheral Triggers submenu under Configuration.  
ATTACH — Attaches the selected trigger to the indicated E-MEM  
register (ON), or turns the trigger OFF.  
FIRE X — Causes the selected (highlighted) trigger to fire (for  
testing purposes).  
FIRE ATTACHED — Causes all attached triggers (set to ON) to fire  
simultaneously, regardless of the current selection (for testing  
purposes).  
NOTE: The Effect: is the currently selected E-MEM register.  
(Keyframe: is the currently selected keyframe.)  
Press exit to return to the Keyframe menu.  
3-92  
Keyframe Menu  
Keyframe Menu  
The Keyframe “top level” menu button invokes the Timeline  
menu. The Timeline Menu provides a graphical display of the  
keyframe positions for all enabled levels in the current E-MEM  
register. This menu allows you to view changes to the effect in the  
selected register while you add, remove, and edit keyframes.  
The Timeline Menu can be accessed either by pressing the  
KEYFRAME button on the main menu panel, or by pressing the  
TIME CURSR button on the E-MEM effects editing panel.  
TIME  
RUN  
RUN DEL  
START  
KF  
TIMELINE MENU  
> ———— Run Cursor  
1:00 KF  
2
Register 8  
2 Keyframes Duration 1:00  
KF editing enabled  
1
2
Master Timeline  
EFF DUR  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
SELECT  
BKGD  
MISC  
CHAN 1  
CHAN 2  
GLOBAL  
CAMERA  
DPM 2  
ZOOM  
1.0X  
DELEGATES  
ENABLES  
PAUSE  
LAST  
PAN / ZOOM  
MOD ALL  
ABSOLUTE  
TIME ALIGN  
LEVELS  
SET  
START TIME  
NO PAUSE  
The appearance of the Timeline Menu is determined by the state  
of the current E-MEM register. Parameters that affect the  
appearance of the menu include the following:  
The number of the current E-MEM register selected on the  
E-MEM keypad  
Which levels are enabled and which are delegated  
The number, location, and duration of keyframes stored in the  
register  
The position of the Time Cursor on the timeline  
3-93  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
The menu illustrated is for a Model 2200-2 Intedgrated switcher  
with all levels enabled, two keyframes in the effect, and keyframe  
editing enabled.  
MOD ALL ABSOLUTE — Performs a Mod operation (see Effects  
Editing section) which causes the values in all keyframes to be  
replaced with the current values in the Current Working Buffer.  
This modifies all keyframes on a given level to a single value (for  
example, changing the background to Blue in all keyframes on  
that level).  
Delegates and Enables  
ENABLES Provides a timeline for each level that is enabled  
by the E-MEM ENABLE buttons. The ENABLE button of each  
enabled level is high-tallied and the name of each enabled  
level is highlighted in the menu.  
DELEGATES Allows individual enabled levels to be  
delegated for modification while keeping the timelines of the  
other enabled levels in the display.  
When DELEGATES is selected, the names of the enabled levels  
become unhighlighted in the menu and the buttons of the  
enabled levels go to low tally on the E-MEM Enable panel.  
Then, pressing one or more of the Enable buttons will  
delegate the selected levels for timeline editing. The buttons  
of the delegated levels will go to high tally and the names of the  
delegated levels will be highlighted in the menu. (The buttons  
of the undelegated enabled levels will remain at low tally.)  
PAUSE — Allows you to insert a pause at a keyframe. When a  
pause is added to a keyframe and a run is performed, the run will  
stop at that keyframe on any level that has the pause  
programmed. The presence of a pause at any keyframe and on  
any timeline is indicated by a sloped line following the keyframe  
marker. Each pause marker will also appear on the Master  
Timeline.  
The rules for adding a pause or inserting a keyframe that contains  
a pause are the same as for changing any other parameter. You  
3-94  
 
Keyframe Menu  
can add a pause to an existing keyframe by parking on that  
keyframe, enabling PAUSE, and doing a Mod. Or you can insert a  
keyframe with a pause by enabling PAUSE, then doing an Insert  
After or Insert Before.  
Software version 5.2 adds the ability to insert a pause at a  
keyframe. When a pause is added to a keyframe and a run is  
performed, the run stops at that keyframe on any level that has the  
pause programmed. The presence of a pause at any keyframe and  
on any timeline is indicated by a sloped line following the  
keyframe marker. Each pause marker also appears on the Master  
Timeline.  
The rules for adding a pause or inserting a keyframe that contains  
a pause are the same as for changing any other parameter. You  
can add a pause to an existing keyframe by parking on that  
keyframe, enabling PAUSE, and doing a Mod. Or you can insert a  
keyframe with a pause by enabling PAUSE, then doing an Insert  
After or Insert Before.  
The basic rules for Auto Run on/ off remain the same, but the  
results of running effects appear differently when pauses are  
programmed.  
> ———— Run Cursor  
Register 8  
0:00  
5
KF  
1
TIME  
RUN  
RUN DEL  
START  
KF  
TIMELINE MENU  
8 Keyframes  
Duration 7:00  
6
KF editing enabled  
Master Timeline  
1
2
3
4
7
8
EFF DUR  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
BKGD  
4:00  
5:00  
SELECT  
ZOOM  
1.0X  
DELEGATES  
ENABLES  
PAUSE  
NO PAUSE  
LAST  
PAN / ZOOM  
MOD ALL  
ABSOLUTE  
TIME ALIGN  
LEVELS  
SET  
START TIME  
3-95  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Example 1 – Inserting a Pause  
1. Press the Keyframe button on the top menu panel or the Time  
Cursr button on the Effects Editing panel to bring up the  
Timeline Menu.  
2. Recall an empty register or one that you can write over.  
3. If in Enable Mode, enable M/E 1, M/E 2, and Bkgd. If in  
Delegate mode, delegate M/E 1, M/E 2, and Bkgd.  
4. Set up a Timeline Menu similar to that shown above; that is,  
with staggered keyframes on the various levels, staggered  
independent timeline lengths, and a total of about 8  
keyframes. We will discuss adding the pauses in a moment.  
(If you dont know how to set up these timelines and  
keyframes, refer to the Effects Editing portion of your User  
Guide or Operators manual.)  
5. Select DELEGATES in the Timeline Menu if not in this mode  
already.  
6. Undelegate M/E 2 and Bkgd (in the above example). (Turn off  
M/E and Bkgd on the E-MEM panel.)  
7. Rewind the effect, then press Next KF to move to Keyframe 2.  
8. In the Timeline menu, undelegate the levels you do not wish  
to modify, and delegate those levels you do wish to modify.  
a. Press PAUSE/NO PAUSE button until the desired state  
appears highlighted.  
b. Press MOD.  
NOTE: If the pause state of all delegated levels are not identical, neither  
PAUSE or NO PAUSE is selectable.  
3-96  
 
Keyframe Menu  
Example 2 – Inserting a Pause  
1. Press E-MEM on the top menu panel to bring up the E-MEM  
menu, then the soft KF PATHS button in the E-MEM menu to  
access the Keyframe Path menu. Note (in the upper right  
corner of the menu) that we are still on Keyframe 2 in the  
selected register.  
2. Select M/E 1 with the SELECT LEVEL button in the E-MEM  
Keyframe Path Menu, then turn ON the PAUSE function.  
Register: 8 Keyframe: 2  
KEYFRAME PATH MENU  
E-MEM / kf path  
TRANSITION S-LINEAR  
KEY 1  
KEY 2  
LINEAR  
S-LINEAR  
HOLD  
TENSION  
= 0.00  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
KEY A  
For 2200-2i, delete M/E3,  
PGM/PST, DSK; change DPMs  
KEY B  
HOLD  
M/E 3  
WIPES  
S-LINEAR  
CURVE  
PGM PST  
DSK  
WIPEXFORM  
ALL  
CONTINUITY  
= 0.00  
MISC  
FSTOREXFRM  
BKGD  
DPM 1  
DPM 2  
DPM 3  
DPM 4  
HOLD  
LINEAR  
S-LINEAR  
CURVE  
ON  
BIAS  
= 0.00  
WIPEXFORM  
OFF  
SELECT  
LEVEL  
SELECT  
GROUP  
PATH  
TYPE  
PAUSE  
3. Press Last Menu on the top menu panel to return to the  
Keyframe Menu.  
4. Press Mod. This modifies the selected keyframe (2) on the  
delegated level (M/ E 1) to now include the programmed  
pause.  
5. Move to keyframe 4 with the Next KF button and, in the same  
manner, add a pause to the BKGD level. (Undelegate M/E 1  
and delegate Bkgd.)  
6. Note that an easy way to move back and forth between the  
Keyframe Menu and the E-MEM Menu is with the Last Menu  
button.  
7. Press Rewind.  
3-97  
 
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Effect Run with Auto Run Off (Master Timeline Enabled)  
8. Turn off Auto Run if it is on.  
9. Press Run.  
Note that when a run is performed while Auto Run is off (Auto  
Run pushbutton not lit), the run is performed on the Master  
Timeline; therefore, the run stops at any keyframe that has a  
pause programmed on any level. Thus, in the example, the  
run stops on all levels at Keyframe 2.  
> ———— Run Cursor  
Register 8  
1:00  
5
KF  
2
TIME  
RUN  
RUN DEL  
START  
KF  
TIMELINE MENU  
8 Keyframes  
Duration 7:00  
6
KF editing enabled  
Master Timeline  
1
2
3
4
7
8
EFF DUR  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
BKGD  
4:00  
5:00  
SELECT  
ZOOM  
1.0X  
DELEGATES  
ENABLES  
PAUSE  
NO PAUSE  
LAST  
PAN / ZOOM  
MOD ALL  
ABSOLUTE  
TIME ALIGN  
LEVELS  
SET  
START TIME  
10. Press Run again. The run proceeds to the pause programmed  
at keyframe 4 on the BKGD level.  
11. Press Run again. All levels of the effect run to the end of the  
effect (keyframe 8).  
3-98  
 
Keyframe Menu  
Effect Run with Auto Run On (Independent Timelines Enabled)  
12. Turn on Auto Run and rewind the effect.  
13. Press Run.  
Note that when a run is performed while Auto Run is on (Auto  
Run pushbutton lit), runs are made on the enabled  
independent timelines (regardless of delegation), not on the  
Master Timeline. In the example, the M/E 1 and BKGD levels  
run to their respective pauses and stop, while the M/E 2 effect  
runs to the end of its timeline. See Figure 4.  
> ———— Run Cursor  
Register 8  
0:00  
5
KF  
1
TIME  
RUN  
RUN DEL  
START  
KF  
TIMELINE MENU  
8 Keyframes  
Duration 7:00  
6
KF editing enabled  
Master Timeline  
1
2
3
4
7
8
EFF DUR  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
BKGD  
4:00  
5:00  
SELECT  
ZOOM  
1.0X  
DELEGATES  
ENABLES  
PAUSE  
NO PAUSE  
LAST  
PAN / ZOOM  
MOD ALL  
ABSOLUTE  
TIME ALIGN  
LEVELS  
SET  
START TIME  
14. Press Run again. The M/E 1 and BKGD levels run to the end of  
their independent timelines, while the M/E 2 effect remains at  
the end of its timeline.  
NOTE: During a Run, independent timelines stop and remain at their  
respective last keyframe. If all timelines are at their end, then the next  
Run command restarts all timelines in sync from the beginning of the  
timeline.  
3-99  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
NOTE: With Auto Run on and Independent Timelines running, the  
Master Timeline remains at its first Keyframe (or zero time). When the  
Independent Timelines arrive at their last keyframe, the Independent  
Timelines are “skewed” from the Master Timeline position, and all  
Timeline edits are disabled. For you to enable a Keyframe edit, press  
REWIND or GO TO KF and the Master and Independent Timelines sync,  
allowing further Timeline editing.  
Lever Arm Scaling  
Run the effect with the lever arm.  
Note that each partial run to the next pause is scaled to  
full scale of the lever arm. This is true whether Auto Run  
is on or off.  
Keyframe Runs in a Sequence  
Remember that you must have Auto Run on when you Run a  
sequence in order for the keyframe effects in the recalled registers  
to run when the sequence is recalled.  
Note that, with Auto Run on, any Recalled effect that has a pause  
programmed at any enabled keyframe causes the effect in only  
that level—and the sequence—to pause.  
Pause on First or Last Keyframe  
A Pause on the first keyframe with Auto Run on causes the effect  
on that level to not run. Occasions on which the presence of a  
pause on the first or last keyframe becomes significant are as  
follows:  
If the first keyframe on a timeline has a pause and a new  
keyframe is inserted before it, the second keyframe will then  
have a pause that will affect the running of the effect  
3-100  
 
Keyframe Menu  
If the last keyframe on a timeline has a pause and a new  
keyframe is inserted after it, the next-to-last keyframe will  
then have the pause.  
If the first keyframe on an individual levels timeline has a  
pause and the beginning of that timeline is skewed with  
respect to the beginning of the overall effect, the effect stops  
on that pause if the effect is running on the Master Timeline  
(Auto Run off).  
If the last keyframe on an individual levels timeline has a  
pause and that timeline is not as long as the overall effect, the  
entire effect stops on that pause if the effect is running on the  
Master Timeline (Auto Run off).  
TIME ALIGN LEVELS — Adjusts the start times of all delegated  
levels so that their current times align.  
SET START TIME — Sets the start time (time of the first keyframe)  
of all delegated levels to the time of the cursor. The relative timing  
of all keyframes within a level remains unchanged; only the start  
times of delegated levels are changed.  
TIME SELECT — Selects the function of the TIME knob, as follows:  
RUN — Runs the current effect with the delegated soft knob.  
Usage is the same as the E-MEM subpanel RUN button. Only  
enabled levels are activated in this operation.  
RUN DEL — Runs multiple keyframe effects in their relative  
time position.  
START — Adds a delay to where the keyframe begins.  
KF —“Slides” a delegated keyframe timeline relative to the  
next/ previous keyframe. Durations remain fixed. If CONST  
DUR is set, the overall effect duration is unaffected.  
EFF DUR — “Slides “ the overall effect duration; scales the  
delegated levels.  
NOTE: Other soft button and soft knob functions that appear in the  
Timeline Menu under specific conditions are discussed in the User  
Guide.  
3-101  
 
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Aux Menu  
Press the aux bus top level menu button to select the Aux Bus  
Menu. Use this menu to select looping mode on Aux Buses 1 and 2  
(when used with the Effects Send feature), or to deselect looping  
mode.  
AUX MENU  
/aux bus  
PVW BUS  
MASK BUS  
PVW  
MASK  
1
2
ME/ 1  
3
AUX BUS 1 AUX BUS 1  
AUX BUS 2 AUX BUS 2  
EXT LOOP  
EXT LOOP  
EXT LOOP  
VIDEO  
= 16  
AUX BUS 3  
AUX BUS 3  
16  
AUX BUS 4 FRAMESTORE  
S/16  
AUX BUS 4  
AUX BUS 5 AUX BUS 5  
AUX BUS 6 AUX BUS 6  
AUX BUS 7 AUX BUS 7  
AUX BUS 8 AUX BUS 8  
AUX BUS 9 AUX BUS 9  
KEY  
= S/16  
LOGICAL  
PHYSICAL  
VIDEO XPT  
KEY XPT  
NO LOOP  
EXT LOOP  
AUX 1  
AUX BUS 4  
FRAMESTORE  
LOG AUX  
SELECT  
EFX LOOP  
MODE  
TAKE  
The following selections are available from the Aux Menu:  
BUS SELECT — Selects the physical aux bus to be used in the  
effects send loop.  
Both the logical and physical Aux Bus numbers are displayed  
on the Aux Bus Menu in the BUS SELECT column. Logical  
buses are those bus numbers that are assigned to physical  
buses via control panel and software menus. Physical buses  
are the actual bus outputs. Physical buses are assigned to  
logical buses (that is, physical buses can be moved; logical  
buses may not). In the BUS SELECT column, the physical bus  
is shown in parentheses.  
3-102  
   
Aux Menu  
EFX LOOP MODE — Turns the effects send loop on EXT LOOP or  
off NO LOOP.  
The E-MEM CONTROL column activates E-MEM recalls for the  
BUS SELECT choice. You must assign the Aux Bus to MISC, or a  
DPM level, on the Config/ Extern IF/ DPM Setup/ Map Aux Buses  
Menu.  
PVW and MASK recall control may be disabled, but they are  
always assigned to the MISC E-MEM level.  
NOTE: Buses assigned to Kaleidoscope or Krystal are under their  
control and are not effected by the switcher’s E-MEM system. Therefore,  
E-MEM recall control is not possible with those buses.  
If the Aux Bus Menu is delegated to Kaleidoscope, the Near Side,  
Far Side, and Both Side selections are enabled.  
NEAR SIDE — the NEAR SIDE column indicates which side you  
will be changing the input to.  
FAR SIDE — the FAR SIDE will be changing to the opposite side  
or the side you dont see. If FRONT is visible (displayed in the  
NEAR SIDE column), then BACK is the FAR side.  
BOTH SIDES — Use BOTH SIDES if you want to use the same  
video image on both Near and Far sides (default selection).  
TAKE — Source changes may be made with the Aux button row  
on the Control Panel, a Remote Aux Panel, or the TAKE button on  
the Aux Bus Menu. The selection that will be acted upon next is  
shown by a highlighted menu button, and in the APPLY  
CHANGES TO column on the Aux Bus Menu.  
3-103  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Mask Menu  
Press the mask button to select the Mask menu. Use this menu to  
adjust the opacity of the inhibit mask and turn the chroma trap on  
or off.  
INHIBIT MASK OPACITY  
= 100%  
MASK MENU  
mask  
KEY1  
OFF  
ON  
M/E 1  
KEY2  
M/E 1  
M/E2  
ON  
KEY 2  
OFF  
M/E  
SELECT  
BUS  
SELECT  
INH MASK  
OPACITY  
The Mask menu selections are:  
KEYER SELECT — Delegates a keyer for the following  
selections.  
INH MASK OPACITY Enables or disables the INHIBIT MASK  
OPACITY soft knob.  
INHIBIT MASK OPACITY — Adjusts opacity of the inhibit  
mask. Available only for Key 1 and Key 2 in the M/ Es.  
3-104  
   
Matte Menu  
Matte Menu  
Press the matte button to select the Matte menu. Use this menu to  
adjust the luminance level of Backgrounds 1 and 2 down to  
superblack, and to adjust the user-definable wash angle.  
USER DEF  
WASH ANGLE  
= 45 degrees  
MATTE MENU  
matte  
SUPERBLK SUPERBLK  
ON  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
OFF  
BKGD 1  
LUM  
BKGD 2  
LUM  
USER DEF  
WASH ANGLE  
MATTE  
COPY >  
TEXTURE >  
The following menu selections are accessible through the Matte  
menu:  
BKGD 1 LUM and BKGD 2 LUM — Enables or disables luminance  
adjustment down to superblack with the Background 1 and/ or  
Background 2 LUM controls.  
USER DEF WASH ANGLE — Enables the WASH ANGLE soft knob.  
matte copy> — Open the Matte Copy menu.  
3-105  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Matte Copy Menu  
From the Matte menu, press the matte copy> button to display the  
Matte Copy menu. This menu is used to copy or swap all Matte  
settings from one Matte Generator to another.  
MATTE COPY MENU  
matte / matte copy  
COPY MATTE 2 OF M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL  
TO  
MATTE 1 OF M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL  
SWAP MATTE 2 OF M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL WITH MATTE 1 OF M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL  
KEY 1 FILL  
KEY 1 BORD  
KEY 2 FILL  
KEY 1 FILL  
KEY 1 BORD  
KEY 2 FILL  
KEY 2 BORD  
PRI WIPE  
2 TO 1  
1 TO 2  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
BKGD  
KEY 2 BORD MATTE 1  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
BKGD  
PRI WIPE  
SEC WIPE  
MATTE 2  
BOTH  
SEC WIPE  
FROM  
GROUP  
FROM  
MATTE GEN  
SIDE  
SELECT  
TO  
GROUP  
TO  
DO MATTE  
SWAP  
DO MATTE  
COPY  
MATTE GEN  
The following menu selections are accessible through the Matte  
Copy menu:  
FROM GROUP — Selects the M/ E to copy or swap from.  
FROM MATTE GEN — Selects the Matte Generator to copy or swap  
from.  
SIDE SELECT Selects the source and destination mattes for  
copying or swapping. (Each Matte Generator has two mattes.)  
TO GROUP Selects the M/ E to copy or swap to.  
TO MATTE GEN Selects the Matte Generator to copy or swap to.  
DO MATTE SWAP Initiates the matte swap currently selected.  
DO MATTE COPY Initiates the matte copy currently selected.  
3-106  
   
Frame Store Menu  
NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap  
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting  
the menu in order to take effect.  
Press exit to return to the Matte menu.  
Frame Store Menu  
The Frame Store menu and submenus include operational  
settings for the Frame Store Option.  
FRAME STORE MENU  
frame store  
VIDEO PAGE SELECT  
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4  
KEY PAGE SELECT  
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4  
SHADOW BLUR  
= 0.0%  
ON  
ON  
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY  
= 0%  
OFF  
OFF  
DRP SHADOW  
BLUR  
LOCK  
VIDEO/KEY  
PICTURE  
PROCESS>  
PARAM  
COPY >  
VIDEO  
STORE >  
KEY  
STORE >  
DRP SHADOW BLUR — Turns on or off the Frame Store Drop  
Shadow blur and enables the shadow blur adjustment knobs.  
SHADOW BLUR — Adjusts the amount of blur to be applied to  
the Drop Shadow.  
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the ratio of vertical to  
horizontal blur on the Drop Shadow. When set to 0.0, the  
vertical and horizontal blur are equal.  
3-107  
     
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
LOCKVIDEO/KEY — Causes the key store to follow any parameter  
change that you make in the associated video store.  
PICTURE COPY> — Opens the Picture Copy menu. Use to copy or  
swap picture settings.  
PARAM COPY> — Opens the Parameter Copy menu. Use to copy  
or swap parameter settings.  
VIDEO STORE> Opens the Video Store menu.  
KEY STORE> Opens the Key Store menu.  
Frame Store Picture Process Menu  
The Frame Store Picture Process Menu is used to enhance Frame  
Store image manipulation.  
Compress, Filter, Bevel, and Copy functions are available on this  
menu.  
VIDEO PAGE SELECT  
FRAME STORE MENU  
frame store  
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4  
KEY PAGE SELECT  
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4  
AUX 2 feeds the Frame Store  
SHADOW BLUR  
= 0.0%  
ON  
ON  
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY  
= 0%  
OFF  
OFF  
KEY  
DRP SHADOW  
BLUR  
LOCK  
VIDEO/KEY  
PICTURE  
COPY >  
PARAM  
COPY >  
VIDEO  
STORE>  
KEY  
STORE >  
MASK  
STORE >  
2200  
3-108  
 
Frame Store Menu  
Compress — The Compress operation will compress the FROM  
page to the TO page. The compressed image will end up in the  
upper left-hand corner of the TO page.  
The key from the corresponding FROM page in the Key Store can  
be processed in one of three ways.  
Create — This will make a 4x3 key in the corresponding TO Key  
Store page that is the same size as the compressed video. Use this  
option if the FROM video is a full-screen image. Set up the Frame  
Store to output Shaped video in this mode.  
Compress — Use this option to compress titles and other keys.  
This will compress the corresponding FROM Key Store page the  
same as the Video Store page.  
None — This selection does nothing with or to the Key Store  
pages.  
When using Compress, it is best to lock the key to the video. Also,  
if the edges have blanking the Crop function is useful. It is also  
useful to note the repositioning of compressed video will run in  
realtime.  
NOTE: Compress works only on still frozen video.  
Filter — Filter only affects the luma of the video page. You can  
select one of the following filter options. You will want to  
experiment with them to achieve the desired effect.  
NOTE: For a better looking Emboss effect, Soften the image first before  
using Emboss.  
Emboss — Use for image edge enhancement and shading;  
gives image a 3D appearance.  
Sharpen — Sharpens the image.  
Soften — Softens the image.  
3-109  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
With the filter type selected, press the DO FILTER soft button as  
many times as applicable to implement the effect.  
NOTE: Multiple button pushes are stored in a buffer. The buffer will  
continue to increment even if you have finished pressing buttons. It may  
take up to 30 seconds to complete five passes.  
Bevel — Bevel gives an image a “lighted picture frame” in a 3-D  
type of effect. The BRIGHTNESS soft knob controls the quantity  
of light projected on the frame. BEVELWIDTH controls the width  
of the frame. The LIGHT SOURCE button selects where the light  
comes from: Bottom, Top, Right, or Left.  
NOTE: This should be used on a full 4x3 image. The results may look  
strange otherwise.  
Copy — Use COPY from the PROCESS choices to copy or swap  
to and from video and key store pages.  
Lock Video/Key — When ON, the Key Store> selection button is  
disabled (invisible).  
3-110  
Frame Store Menu  
Parameter Copy Menu  
Use the Parameter Copy menu to copy or swap all parameter  
settings from video to video, key to key, or video to key.  
FRAME STORE PARAMETER COPY MENU  
frame store / parameter copy  
COPY PARAMETERS FROM  
SWAP PARAMETERS FROM  
TO  
KEY STORE  
KEY STORE  
VIDEO STORE  
VIDEO STORE  
WITH  
VIDEO STORE  
KEY STORE  
VIDEO STORE  
KEY STORE  
FROM  
STORE  
TO  
STORE  
DO  
SWAP  
DO  
COPY  
The Parameter Copy menu selections are:  
FROM STORE — Selects the store to copy/ swap from.  
TO STORE — Selects the store to copy/ swap to.  
DO SWAP — Initiates the Picture swap currently selected.  
DO COPY — Initiates the Picture copy currently selected.  
3-111  
 
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Video Store Menu  
The Video Store menu allows you to select the page, set the strobe  
period, and provides access to Video Store positioning and  
pseudo color controls.  
VIDEO STORE MENU  
frame store / video store  
PAGE SELECT  
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4  
4 FIELD  
2 FIELD  
INTERPOLATE  
REPLICATE  
FRAME  
TYPE  
PSEUDO  
COLOR >  
INTERPOLATE  
MOSAIC >  
CROP > REPOSITION > FILTER >  
INterpolate — Select how the video data is to be interpreted. For  
example, interpolate evaluates screen lines 1 and 3 and averages  
them to get line 2. Replicate copies line 1 to create line 2, line 3 to  
create line 4, etc.  
3-112  
   
Frame Store Menu  
STROBE — When ON is selected, Strobe is activated. Strobe  
alternates between a frozen Frame Store image and a selected  
source image with the frequency set by the soft knobs described  
below. The difference between the time settings is what varies the  
strobe effect.  
STROBE TIME PERIOD — Sets the time (in fields) for the  
delegated video source to be displayed. Minimum time  
period is 4 fields.  
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD — Sets the time (in fields) during  
which the frozen frame store is displayed. Minimum time  
period is 8 fields.  
PAGE SELECT — Selects one of four pages (frames) of the video  
image.  
MOSAIC> — Opens the Video Store Mosaic menu.  
PSEUDOCOLOR> — Opens the Video Store Pseudo Color Menu.  
crop> — Opens the Video Store Crop menu.  
REPOSITION> — Opens the Video Store Reposition menu.  
FILTER> — Opens the Video Store Filter menu.  
3-113  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Video Store Mosaic Menu  
This menu allows you to apply and adjust a mosaic pattern to the  
video store video.  
VIDEO STORE MOSAIC MENU  
frame store / video store / mosaic  
MOSAIC SIZE  
= 50%  
MOSAIC ASPECT  
= 0.00  
FIRST ACTIVE PIXEL  
= 0  
ON  
OFF  
MOSAIC  
MOSAIC — Turns on the mosaic feature and enables the mosaic  
adjustment soft knobs.  
MOSAIC SIZE — Adjusts the width of the mosaic area, up to  
100% of the screen.  
MOSAIC ASPECT — Adjusts the vertical-to-horizontal aspect  
of the mosaic area.  
FIRST ACTIVE PIXEL — Adjusts the positioning of the left edge  
of the mosaic area.  
3-114  
   
Frame Store Menu  
Video Store Pseudo Color Menu  
The Pseudo Color menu allows you to select normal or reversed  
video, and several pseudocolor modes. The mode selected  
determines the functions of the fourth and fifth soft buttons and  
the soft knobs.  
The following illustration is the appearance of the Video Store  
Pseudo Color menu when POSTR/SOLR is selected.  
POSTERIZATION  
VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU  
frame store / video store / pseudo color  
= 0.0  
SOLARIZATION  
= 0.0  
POSTR/SOLR  
HUE MOD  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
COLOR MOD  
CONTRAST  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
REVERSE  
VIDEO  
UNSHAPE/  
RESHAPE  
MODE  
SELECT  
POSTERIZE SOLARIZE  
REVERSE VIDEO — Turns reverse video on or off, which inverts  
the luminance (white and black are reversed) and places each hue  
180° away from its original color.  
UNSHAPE/RESHAPE — Allows shaped video (of a video/ key  
pair) to be unshaped before being bitmapped, then reshaped after  
bitmapping. This button appears only if Key Store is configured as  
Key.  
MODE SELECT — Selects one of four pseudocolor modes, as  
described on the following pages.  
3-115  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Posterization/Solarization  
Selecting POSTR/SOLR mode provides adjustment of the  
posterization and solarization parameters.  
POSTERIZE — Causes the luminance values of a frozen image to  
be changed from a continuous scale to a limited(adjustable)  
number of steps.  
POSTERIZATION — Adjusts the number of steps of luminance.  
SOLARIZE — Causes the chrominance values of a frozen image to  
be changed from a continuous scale to a limited(adjustable)  
number of steps.  
SOLARIZATION — Adjusts the number of steps of  
chrominance.  
Pseudo Color Hue Modification  
3-116  
   
Frame Store Menu  
The following illustration is the appearance of the Pseudo Color  
menu when HUE MOD is selected.  
HUE MOD START PHASE  
VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU  
frame store / video store / pseudo color  
= 0.0  
HUE MOD END PHASE  
= 0.0  
HUE MOD SATURATION  
= 0.0  
POSTR/SOLR  
HUE MOD  
ON  
ON  
COLOR MOD  
CONTRAST  
ON  
CW  
OFF  
CCW  
OFF  
OFF  
REVERSE  
VIDEO  
UNSHAPE/  
RESHAPE  
MODE  
SELECT  
HUE  
MOD  
HUE MOD  
PATH  
HUE MOD — Enables the hue modification feature, which strips  
chroma from the stored image and substitutes a spectrum of  
colors for the resulting black and white. Also enables the soft  
knobs for adjustment of the colors to be substituted.  
HUE MOD START PHASE and HUE MOD END PHASE Adjust  
the starting color and ending color of the spectrum to be  
substituted for black and white.  
HUE MOD SATURATION Adjusts the saturation of the color  
spectrum to be substituted.  
HUE MOD PATH — Sets the direction of the hue substitution  
from black to white, as viewed on a vectorscope.  
Pseudo Color Modification  
3-117  
 
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
The following illustration is the appearance of the Pseudo Color  
menu when COLOR MOD is selected. This menu provides  
adjustment of the color modification parameters.  
VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU  
frame store / video store / pseudo color  
BLACK HUE  
= 0.0  
BLACK SAT  
= 0.0  
BLACK BRIGHT  
= 0.0  
POSTR/SOLR  
HUE MOD  
ON  
ON  
COLOR MOD  
CONTRAST  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
REVERSE  
VIDEO  
UNSHAPE/  
RESHAPE  
MODE  
SELECT  
COLOR  
MOD  
BLK/WHT  
DELEGATE  
COLOR MOD — Enables the color modification feature, which  
strips chroma from the stored image, then substitutes two colors  
for the black and white limits of the resulting image.  
BLK/WHT DELEGATE — Delegates the soft knobs for adjustment of  
the color to be substituted.  
BLACK HUE, BLACK SAT, and BLACK BRIGHT or WHITE HUE,  
WHITE SAT, and WHITE BRIGHT — Adjust the color and  
luminance of the colors to be substituted for the black and  
white portions of the signal.  
Pseudo Color Contrast  
3-118  
 
Frame Store Menu  
The following illustration is the appearance of the Pseudo Color  
menu when CONTRAST is selected.  
CONTRAST LUM SLOPE  
VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU  
frame store / video store / pseudo color  
= 0.0  
CONTRAST LUM RANGE  
= 0  
CONTRAST SATURATION  
= 0.0  
POSTR/SOLR  
HUE MOD  
ON  
ON  
COLOR MOD  
CONTRAST  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
REVERSE  
VIDEO  
UNSHAPE/  
RESHAPE  
MODE  
SELECT  
CONTRAST  
CONTRAST Turns on the contrast function and enables the  
contrast adjustment knobs. Adjustment of these controls is highly  
subjective and depends on the characteristics of the image and the  
desires of the operator.  
CONTRAST LUM SLOPE — Adjusts the luminance contrast of  
the stored video.  
CONTRAST LUM RANGE — Adjusts the luminance offset of  
the video.  
CONTRAST SATURATION — Adjusts the saturation of the  
video chrominance.  
Video Store Crop Menu  
3-119  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
This menu allows you to crop (mask) portions of the stored video.  
VIDEO STORE CROP MENU  
frame store / video store / crop  
TOP  
= 0.00 screen units  
BOTTOM  
= 0.00 screen units  
LEFT  
= 0.00 screen units  
ON  
RIGHT  
= 0.00 screen units  
OFF  
CROP  
CROP — Turns on the crop feature and enables the soft knob  
adjustments for positioning the crop.  
TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, and RIGHT — Adjust the limits of the  
crop for the stored video.  
3-120  
Frame Store Menu  
Video Store Reposition Menu  
This menu allows positioning of the video store output image.  
VIDEO STORE REPOSITION MENU  
frame store / video store / reposition  
Coarse Adjust Horizontal  
= 0.0000 Screen Units  
(0.00 Pixels)  
Blur is currently ON.  
Position values are limited to  
4 Line, 1 Pixel boundaries  
Fine Adjust Horizontal  
Coarse Adjust Vertical  
= 0.0000 Screen Units  
(0.00 Lines)  
Fine Adjust Vertical  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL  
POSITION POSITION  
PIXEL  
DETENT  
RESTORE  
DEFAULTS  
HORIZONTAL POSITION — Enables or disables horizontal  
positioning of the stored (frozen or unfrozen) image.  
Coarse Adjust Horizontal and Fine Adjust Horizontal soft knobs  
Adjust the horizontal position of the image.  
VERTICAL POSITION — Enables or disables vertical positioning of  
the stored (frozen or unfrozen) image.  
Coarse Adjust Vertical and Fine Adjust Vertical soft knobs —  
Adjust the vertical position of the image.  
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Returns the image to the original position.  
3-121  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Video Store Filter Menu (Blur)  
The Video Store Filter menu allows you to apply either a blur or  
hue rotate to the video store output image.  
FILTER SELECT — Selects either BLUR or HUE ROTATE filter mode.  
Following is the appearance of the menu when BLUR is selected.  
VIDEO STORE FILTER MENU  
frame store / video store / filter  
LUM BLUR  
0%  
CHROMA BLUR  
0%  
BLUR SYMMETRY  
0%  
BLUR  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
HUE ROTATE  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
FILTER  
SELECT  
SEPARATE  
LUM/CHROMA  
LUM  
BLUR  
CHROMA  
BLUR  
BLUR  
SYMMETRY  
BLUR  
BLUR — Turns on the blur filter mode.  
SEPARATE LUM/CHROMA — Allows separate adjustment of  
luminance blur and chrominance blur applied to the video store  
image.  
LUM BLUR — Enables the LUM BLUR adjustment.  
LUM BLUR — Adjust the amount of luminance blur applied to  
the image.  
3-122  
   
Frame Store Menu  
CHROMA BLUR — Enables the CHROMA BLUR adjustment.  
CHROMA BLUR — Adjusts the amount of chrominance blur  
applied to the video store image.  
BLUR SYMMETRY — Enables the BLUR SYMMETRY horizontal  
adjustment.  
BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the vertical proportions of  
luminance and chrominance blur.  
Video Store Filter Menu (Hue Rotate)  
This is the appearance of the Video Store Filter menu when HUE  
ROTATE is selected.  
VIDEO STORE FILTER MENU  
frame store / video store / filter  
HUE ANGLE  
0 deg  
BLUR  
ON  
HUE ROTATE  
OFF  
FILTER  
SELECT  
HUE  
ROTATE  
HUE ROTATE — Turns on the hue rotate filter mode which rotates  
the chrominance as observed on a Vectorscope.  
HUE ANGLE — Adjusts the angle of hue rotation.  
3-123  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Key Store Menu  
The Key Store menu allows you to select the page, set the strobe  
period, and provides access to Key Store positioning.  
KEY STORE MENU  
frame store / key store  
PAGE SELECT  
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4  
STROBE TIME PERIOD  
= 20  
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD  
= 10  
ON  
2 FIELD  
OFF  
STROBE  
CROP > REPOSITION > FILTER >  
STROBE When ON is selected, Strobe is activated.  
STROBE TIME PERIOD — Sets the time for the Strobe.  
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD — Sets the time for the Strobe to  
freeze.  
PAGE SELECT — Selects one of four pages (frames) of the key  
image.  
CROP> — Opens the Key Store Crop menu.  
REPOSITION> — Opens the Key Store Reposition menu.  
FILTER> — Opens the Key Store Filter menu.  
3-124  
   
Frame Store Menu  
Key Store Crop Menu  
This menu allows you to crop (mask) portions of the stored key.  
KEY STORE CROP MENU  
frame store / key store / crop  
TOP  
= 0.00 screen units  
BOTTOM  
= 0.00 screen units  
LEFT  
= 0.00 screen units  
ON  
RIGHT  
= 0.00 screen units  
OFF  
CROP  
CROP —Turns on the crop feature and enables the soft knob  
adjustments for positioning the crop.  
TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, and RIGHT — Adjust the limits of the  
crop for the stored key.  
3-125  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Key Store Reposition Menu  
This menu allows positioning of the key store output image.  
KEY STORE REPOSITION MENU  
frame store / key store / reposition  
Coarse Adjust Horizontal  
= 0.0000 Screen Units  
0 Pixels)  
Blur is currently ON.  
Position values are limited to  
4 Line, 1 Pixel boundaries  
Fine Adjust Horizontal  
Coarse Adjust Vertical  
= 0.0000 Screen Units  
(0 Lines)  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Fine Adjust Vertical  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL  
POSITION POSITION  
PIXEL  
DETENT  
RESTORE  
DEFAULTS  
HORIZONTAL POSITION — Enables or disables horizontal  
positioning of the stored key.  
Coarse Adjust Horizontal and Fine Adjust Horizontal soft knobs  
Adjust the horizontal position of the key.  
VERTICAL POSITION — Enables or disables vertical positioning of  
the stored (frozen or unfrozen) key.  
Coarse Adjust Vertical and Fine Adjust Vertical soft knobs —  
Adjust the vertical position of the key.  
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Returns the key to the original position.  
3-126  
   
Frame Store Menu  
Key Store Filter Menu (Blur — Video Mode)  
The Key Store Filter menu allows you to apply a blur to the key  
store output.  
Following is the appearance of the menu when BLUR is selected.  
KEY STORE FILTER MENU  
frame store / key store / filter  
LUM BLUR  
0%  
BLUR SYMMETRY  
0%  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
BLUR  
SYMMETRY  
BLUR  
BLUR — Turns on the blur filter mode.  
BLUR SYMMETRY — Enables the BLUR SYMMETRY adjustment.  
BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the proportions of horizontal  
and vertical blur.  
3-127  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Miscellaneous Menu  
Press the MISC button to select the Misc menu.  
MISC MENU  
/misc  
SAFE  
TITLE>  
SIGNAL  
PROCESS>  
The following menu selections are accessible through the  
Miscellaneous menu:  
SIGNAL PROCESS > — Opens the Signal Process menu, which  
allows you to select Key Filter and Dither modes.  
SAFETITLE > — Opens the Safe Title menu, which allows you to  
turn on or off safe title and select a safe title pattern.  
3-128  
   
Miscellaneous Menu  
Signal Processing Menu  
From the Miscellaneous menu, press the signal Processing>  
button to display the Signal Processing menu. Use the Signal  
Processing menu to turn Key Filter, Dither and Matte Dither  
modes on or off.  
SIGNAL PROCESS MENU  
LUM GAIN  
= 5.0  
/misc/signal_process  
CHROMA GAIN  
= 15.9  
DC OFFSET  
=-20.0 IRE  
OFF  
FREE RUN  
OFF  
ON  
FREE RUN  
OFF  
FRAME LOCK FRAME LOCK  
KEY  
FILTER  
MATTE  
DITHER  
DITHER  
The Signal Processing menu selections are as follows:  
KEY FILTER — Enables/ disables Key Filter mode.  
DITHER — Selects Frame Lock, Free Run, or Off for 8-bit digital  
outputs.  
MATTE DITHER — Selects Frame Lock, Free Run, or Off for 8-bit  
digital outputs for the matte signals.  
3-129  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Safe Title Menu  
From the Miscellaneous menu, press the safe title> button to  
display the Safe Title menu. Use this menu to turn the Safe Title  
mode on or off, select a safe title pattern, and adjust safe title  
horizontal position. The functions of this menu appear only if the  
Safe Title option is installed.  
SAFE TITLE MENU  
SAFE TITLE H-POSITION  
/misc/safe_title  
=
+ 25 clocks  
SAFE TITLE  
SCREEN CTR  
ON  
TITLE & CTR  
X-HATCH  
ON  
PPGGMM  
PVW  
OFF  
OFF  
SAFE  
TITLE  
SAFE TITLE  
SELECT  
SAFE TITLE SAFE TITLE  
POSITION OUTPUT  
The Safe Title menu selections are:  
SAFE TITLE — Turns the Safe Title Generator preview monitor  
display on or off.  
SAFE TITLE SELECT — Selects a safe title pattern. This soft  
button appears only when SAFE TITLE is on.  
SAFE TITLE H-POSITION — Positions safe title horizontally. This  
soft knob appears only when SAFE TITLE is on.  
Press exit to return to the Miscellaneous menu.  
3-130  
     
Disk Menu  
Disk Menu  
Press the disk button to select the Disk menu. Use this menu for  
disk and file management functions such as creating directories,  
and loading and saving files.  
The initial DISK menu appears as shown below when there is no  
disk in the drive.  
DISK MENU  
/disk  
FILE  
SELECT  
CURRENT DIRECTORY  
/FLOPPY  
TOTAL BYTES  
0
FILENAME  
FLOPPY  
EXT  
BYTES  
<DEV>  
DATE  
TIME  
MARKED FILES  
# FILES  
0
# BYTES  
0
CHILD  
DIRECTORY  
UTILS >  
CHILD DIRECTORY — Causes the system to read a diskette in the  
disk drive and to list the parent directory of the diskette.  
3-131  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Pressing CHILD DIRECTORY re-displays the menu with additional  
functions, such as in the sample menu below:  
DISK MENU  
/disk  
FILE  
SELECT  
CURRENT DIRECTORY  
/FLOPPY  
TOTAL BYTES  
0
FILENAME  
/FLOPPY  
EXT  
BYTES  
<DEV>  
DATE  
TIME  
MARKED FILES  
# FILES  
0
# BYTES  
0
VIEW BY  
NAME  
LIST  
PARENT  
LOAD  
FILE >  
SAVE  
FILE >  
MARK FILE  
FOR DELETE  
DIRECTORY DIRECTORY  
DELETE >  
UTILS >  
LIST DIRECTORY — Causes the system to re-read the directory of  
the diskette in the disk drive.  
PARENT DIRECTORY — Backs out from a subdirectory to the  
parent directory.  
LOAD FILE> — Invoke the Load File menu. If a subdirectory is  
selected (see FILE SELECT below), the CHILD DIRECTORY label  
appears instead of LOAD FILE>.  
SAVE FILE> — Invokes the Save File menu.  
MARK FILE FOR DELETE — Marks files so that they may deleted  
simultaneous. (Does not enable simultaneous loading or saving of  
files.)  
DELETE> — Invokes the Confirm Delete menu which allows you  
to DO DELETE or CANCEL. Either a single selected file or a number  
of marked files can be deleted.  
3-132  
Disk Menu  
UTILS> — Opens the Utilities menu.  
FILE SELECT — Moves the selection box through the list of files  
in the directory to select the file or directory to be acted upon by  
subsequent operations.  
VIEW BY NAME/EXT/DIR — Allows the directory to be listed in  
alphabetical order by file name or by extension, or to just list  
subdirectories. The display changes automatically as the new  
selection is made.  
After the diskette directory has been read, the display may look  
something like the following example:  
DISK MENU  
/disk  
FILE  
SELECT  
CURRENT DIRECTORY  
/FLOPPY  
TOTAL BYTES  
8004  
FILENAME  
EXT  
BYTES  
45548  
52665  
55817  
DATE  
TIME  
MARKED FILES  
BOOT  
ABS  
FEB 10 1994  
09:20  
# FILES  
0
# BYTES  
COMM1  
CMP  
FEB 10, 1994  
08:31  
0
COMM2  
CMP  
FEB 10, 1994  
22:27  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LIST  
PARENT  
LOAD  
FILE >  
SAVE  
FILE >  
MARK FILE  
FOR DELETE  
DIRECTORY DIRECTORY  
DELETE >  
UTILS >  
3-133  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Load File Menu  
From the Disk menu, press the Load file> button to display the  
Load File menu. This menu will only display if the selected file is  
an E-MEM register.  
LOAD FILE MENU  
disk / load file  
Load file:  
/FLOPPY/ABLE.R01  
E-MEM  
LOAD  
SELECT  
E-MEM  
BANK  
E-MEM  
ALL  
E-MEM  
REGISTER  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
NO LOAD  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
LOAD  
DPMs  
1-4  
DO  
LOAD  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
MISC  
BKGD  
M/E 1 through DPMs 1-4 — Include or omit portions of the selected  
file before loading it from disk into the switcher.  
E-MEM LOAD SELECT — Enables loading of the selected E-MEM  
REGISTER, the E-MEM BANK containing the selected register, or E-  
MEM ALL (all 100 E-MEM registers).  
NOTE: It takes approximately 6 minutes to load all 100 registers, even  
if most of them are empty. You may prefer to load only specific banks.  
DO LOAD — Brings up the Confirm File Load menu, which allows  
you to DO LOAD or CANCEL.  
3-134  
   
Disk Menu  
If the selected file is a Configuration file instead of an E-MEM file,  
the Load File menu displays as follows:  
LOAD FILE MENU  
disk/load file  
Load file:/FLOPPY/NEWS.CFG  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
NO LOAD  
LOAD  
USER  
PREFS  
SYSTEM  
PARAMS  
EXTERNAL  
OUTPUTS INTERFACE  
CLR WK  
BUF  
DO  
LOAD  
INPUTS  
USER PREFS through EXTERN I/F — Include or omit portions of  
the selected file or buffer before loading it into the switcher.  
DO LOAD — Invokes the Confirm File Load menu, which allows  
you to DO LOAD or CANCEL.  
Press exit to return to the Disk menu.  
3-135  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Save File Menu  
From the Disk menu, press the save file> button to display the  
Save File menu. This menu is used to save selected portions of E-  
MEM register data or Configuration data to disk. You can also  
choose the type of save, the number of registers to be saved, and  
invoke the Name File sub-menu.  
SAVE FILE MENU  
/disk/save_file  
CURRENT DIRECTORY  
/FLOPPY  
TOTAL BYTES  
8004  
REGISTER  
= 24  
SYSTEM  
E-MEM  
REGISTER  
E-MEM  
BANK  
E-MEM  
ALL  
SAVE  
SELECT  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
NO SAVE  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
SAVE  
PGM-PST  
DSK  
DPMs  
1-4  
NAME  
FILE >  
ME 1  
ME 2  
ME 3  
MISC  
BKGD  
M/E 1 through DPMs 1-4 — Select portions of the E-MEM register  
data or switcher Configuration data to be included or omitted  
when saving it to disk.  
SAVE SELECT — Selects the type of save to be done.  
REGISTER = — Selects a single register to be saved. When E-MEM  
BANK is selected, 10 registers at a time can be saved. When E-MEM  
ALL is selected, all 100 registers may be saved in one operation.  
3-136  
   
Disk Menu  
NAME FILE> — Invokes the Name File menu in order to name the  
file(s) that you wish to create on the disk. For an E-MEM file, an  
automatic extension is added to the file name on the disk (for  
example, R24 for register 24). If an E-MEM bank of all E-MEM  
registers is saved, a separate file is created on the disk for each  
E-MEM register.  
If CONFIG is selected in the Save File menu, the menu looks like  
this:  
SAVE FILE MENU  
disk/save file  
CURRENT DIRECTORY  
/FLOPPY  
TOTAL BYTES  
8004  
E-MEM  
REGISTER  
E-MEM  
BANK  
E-MEM  
ALL  
CONFIG  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
NO SAVE  
SAVE  
USER  
PREFS  
SYSTEM  
PARAMS  
EXTERNAL  
OUTPUTS INTERFACE  
CLR WK  
BUF  
NAME  
FILE >  
INPUTS  
USER PREFS through Cur Wk Buf — Select portions of the  
switcher Configuration data to be included or omitted when  
saving it to disk.  
NAME FILE> — Invokes the Name File menu to name the file you  
wish to create on the disk. For a Configuration file, an automatic  
extension of CFG is added to the file name on the disk.  
3-137  
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
Name File Menu  
From the Save File menu, press the name file> button to display  
the Name File menu. This menu is used to name files to be saved.  
NAME FILE MENU  
/disk/save_file/name_file  
(
)
-
String Register:  
USER  
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
M
n
o
p
P
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
Save  
String  
Get  
String  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K L  
N
O
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W X  
Y
Z
File Name:  
WORKIN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Character =  
G
CURSOR  
BACK  
ACCEPT  
CHAR  
CURSOR  
FORWARD  
DELETE  
CHAR  
SAVE  
STRING  
GET  
STRING  
ACCEPT  
NAME  
When ACCEPT NAME is pressed, the Confirm File Save menu  
displays, allowing you to DO SAVE or CANCEL. If a file with the  
same name already exists in the directory, you will be warned of  
that fact and given a third alternative, OVER WRITE, which will  
write the new file over the existing file on the disk (the existing file  
will be erased).  
3-138  
   
Disk Menu  
Utilities Menu  
From the Disk menu, press the utils> button to display the Utilities  
menu. This menu is used to format disks and create subdirectories  
in order to organize your saved files.  
UTILITIES MENU  
/disk/utils  
CURRENT DIRECTORY  
/
TOTAL BYTES  
Ø
DISK USAGE  
KBYTES  
AVAIL  
KBYTES  
USED  
%
USED  
%
AVAIL  
CREATE  
DIR >  
FORMAT  
720K >  
FORMAT  
1.44M >  
3-139  
   
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions  
FORMAT 720K and FORMAT 1.44M — Format a blank or  
previously used disk in the appropriate format. (A 720K disk has  
one write-protect tab; a 1.44M disk has two write-protect tabs.)  
NOTE: Be sure to have the write-protect tab(s) set to off (closed) to allow  
writing to the disk.  
CREATE DIR> — Invokes the Name Directory menu, which  
allows you to create subdirectories on the disk. This menu uses  
the same format as the Name File menu.  
Pressing CREATE DIR> to open the Name Directory menu. Press  
ACCEPT NAME to either DO CREATE or CANCEL. If a duplicate  
directory name already exists in the parent directory a warning is  
issued and the Confirm Create Directory menu allows you to  
RENAME or CANCEL.  
To save files to a subdirectory, rst create the subdirectory, then  
have it open when you save the files that you wish to be in it. (To  
open the subdirectory, select it with the FILE SELECT knob in the  
next higher directory and press CHILD DIRECTORY.)  
3-140  
 
Menu Trees  
4
Introduction  
Many switcher features are accessed via software menus that are  
displayed on the Menu Display. This display can show both  
alphanumeric text and graphics.  
Top Level Menu Buttons  
The menu system is divided into groups of related menus. Any  
particular group of menus can be accessed by pressing one of the  
top level menu buttons located at the left of the menu display.  
Each main menu button (except LAST MENU) brings up a main  
menu, under which there may be sub-menus that allow selection  
of less-frequently used options. (Some top level menus have no  
sub-menus, or contain only one or two levels of sub-menus.)  
Effect  
Switcher  
Effect  
Config  
Picture  
Mixer  
Config  
M/E  
Mode  
Panel  
Setup  
Picture  
Frame  
Keyer  
Chroma  
Key  
Pressing a top level menu button causes the soft button  
assignments in the display to change specifically for that menu.  
Effect  
Oper  
Key/  
Stencil  
Status  
Wipe  
E-MEM  
Key  
Frame  
View  
Run  
Control  
Input/  
Output  
Mask  
Matte  
Graphic  
Display  
Path  
Aux  
Bus  
Frame  
Store  
Clear  
Menu  
Disk  
Misc  
4-1  
     
Section 4— Menu Trees  
Soft Buttons  
The eight “soft” buttons located below the menu display allow  
you to make function and sub-menu selections from menus  
displayed on the screen. The symbol “>” following the name of a  
soft button indicates that pressing that button will bring up a  
lower-level menu.  
A ninth button in the row is a dedicated EXIT button that allows  
you to leave the menu you are in and return to the next higher  
menu on the tree.  
4-2  
Menu Tree Structures  
Menu Tree Structures  
Tree-structure diagrams are presented on the following  
pages for the top level menu buttons  
CLEAR XPT  
CLEAR BUS  
LATCH  
CLEAR SECTION  
CLEAR SWCHR  
NORMAL  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
AUX  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ME 2 KEY DROP  
KEY MEMORY  
CLEAR KEY MEM  
CLEAR XPT  
CLEAR BUS  
CLEAR SWCHR  
MASK  
OFF  
SECTION SELECT  
BUS SELECT  
A
CLEAR XPT  
B
CLEAR BUS  
KEY 1  
KEY 2  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
CLEAR SECTION  
CLEAR SWCHR  
AUTO  
LOOKAHEAD  
PGM  
PVW SELECT  
PVW MODE  
DIM PVW  
ALL KEYERS  
DELEG KEYER  
OFF  
PUSH TO PVW  
ON  
OFF  
PUSH TO PVW  
TIMEOUT  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
BEEPER ON/OFF  
WARNING  
END OF KNOB  
KNOB CENTER  
INACTIVE KNOB  
SHIFT MODE  
KEYER PREFS  
PREVIEW PREFS  
BEEPER PREFS  
DEFINE DEFAULTS  
E-MEM PREFS  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E SELECT  
GVG DEFAULT  
SET DEFAULT  
ENABLE/DISABLE  
ENABLE/DISABLE  
RUN LEVER  
KEYFRAME EDITING  
USER PREFS  
SYSTEM PARAM  
INPUTS  
Mixer  
Config  
OUTPUTS  
EXTERN I/F  
AUX BUS FORMAT  
4 X 3  
16 X 9  
FIELD 1  
FIELD 2  
NONE  
ASPECT RATIO  
FIELD DOMINANCE  
MATTE GEN LIM  
SET CLOCK  
XMITABLE  
VALID RGB  
BOTH  
NONE  
SELECT  
CONFIRM  
DATE —  
TIME —  
YEAR  
HOUR  
MONTH  
MINUTE  
DAY  
SECOND  
See CONFG Part 2  
See CONFG Part 3  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-1. Mixer Config Menu Tree (Part 1)  
4-3  
 
Section 4— Menu Trees  
UNSHAPED VIDEO  
SHAPED VIDEO  
VIDEO/KEY FORMAT  
LOG/PHYS ASSIGNMENT  
NAME XPT BUTTON  
LOG CHANNEL  
PHYS INPUTS  
CURSOR BACK  
ACCEPT CHAR  
CURSOR FORWRD  
DELETE CHAR  
SAVE STRING  
GET STRING  
VIDEO INPUT  
KEY INPUT  
CHROMA KEY INPUT  
ACCEPT NAME  
See CONFG Part 1  
COARSE TIMING  
FINE TIMING  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
ON/OFF  
RGB  
BETA  
YUV  
MII  
SETUP  
INPUT FORMAT  
USER PREFS  
SYSTEM PARAM  
INPUTS  
MAP INPUTS  
CHR KEY INPUTS  
GPI INPUTS  
GPI 1  
GPI 2  
GPI 3  
GPI 4  
GPI 5  
GPI 6  
GPI 7  
GPI 8  
Mixer  
Config  
OUTPUTS  
EXTERN I/F  
AUX BUS FORMAT  
TOP TEST SIGNAL  
BOTTOM TEST SIGNAL  
AUX TALLY  
DISABLE GPI  
RUN  
REWIND  
AUTO RUN  
REVERSE  
GPI SELECT  
MISC  
KF EFFECT  
AUTO TRANS  
CUT  
M/E 1 AUTO TRAN  
M/E 2 AUTO TRAN  
M/E 2 PST BLACK  
See CONFG Part 3  
E-MEM  
FRAME STORE  
PROGRAM GPI  
M/E1  
M/E2  
M/E1 RECALL EFF  
M/E2 RECALL EFF  
MASTER RECALL EFF  
AUTO RECALL MODE  
EFF DISSSOLV  
SEQUENCE MODE  
VIDEO GRAB  
KEY GRAB  
Software Version 5.2  
MASK GRAB  
Figure 4-2. Mixer Config Menu Tree (Part 2)  
4-4  
Menu Tree Structures  
10 BIT/ON  
M/E 1 PGM  
10 BIT/OFF  
8 BIT/ON  
ME1 PGM  
ME2 PGM  
M/E 1 CLEAN  
M/E 2 PGM  
M/E 2 CLEAN  
AUX 1  
8 BIT/OFF  
OFF  
PEAK WHITE  
PEAK BLACK  
BOTH  
10 BIT/OFF  
8 BIT/ON  
OUTPUT SELECT  
LUM LIMITER  
AUX 2  
CHROMA LIMITER  
DIGITAL RES  
10 BIT/ON  
PEAK  
OFF  
10 BIT/OFF  
8 BIT/ON  
OUTPUT SELECT  
8 BIT/OFF  
RESOLUTION/DITHER  
OUTPUT SELECT  
RESOLUTION/DITHER  
See CONFG Part 2  
M/E 1 PVW 8 BIT/ON  
M/E 2 PVW 10 BIT/ON  
10 BIT/OFF  
8 BIT/ON  
See CONFG Part 1  
DEVICE 1  
DEVICE 2  
DEVICE 3  
DEVICE 4  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400  
BAUD  
PARITY  
KSCOPE  
KRYSTAL  
OTHER  
ODD  
EVEN  
NONE  
NONE  
USER PREFS  
SYSTEM PARAM  
INPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
EXTERN I/F  
INTERNAL  
DEVICE SELECT  
DPM TYPE  
EDITOR I/F  
DPM I/F  
PERIPHERAL I/F  
GPI OUTPUTS  
Mixer  
Config  
SWR IN  
SWR OUT  
BOTH  
CHANNEL ROUTING  
DPM MAP AUX BUSES  
DPM MAP INPUTS  
AUX BUS FORMAT  
OFF  
DEVICE 1  
VIDEO DELAY  
CHAN 1-8  
AUX 1-5  
DEVICE 2  
DEVICE 3  
DEVICE 4  
DEVICE SELECT  
CONTROL DELAY  
NO. OF CHANNELS  
FIRST CHANNEL  
DEVICE 1  
DEVICE 2  
DEVICE 3  
DEVICE 4  
1 – 8  
SELECT GPI  
E-MEM LEVEL  
MISC  
DPM 2  
GPI LENGTH  
DPM SELECT  
CHANNEL SELECT  
CHAN 1  
CHAN 2  
CHAN 3  
CHAN 4  
CHAN 5  
CHAN 6  
CHAN 7  
CHAN 8  
VIDEO INPUT  
KEY INPUT  
AUX BUS 3B  
AUX BUS 4B  
AUX BUS 5B  
VIDEO  
KEY  
AUX BUS 1  
AUX BUS SHAPING  
AUX BUS 2  
PHYS AUX SELECT  
VIDEO/KEY FMT  
SHAPED  
UNSHAPED  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-3. Mixer Config Menu Tree (Part 3)  
4-5  
Section 4— Menu Trees  
PAGE UP  
PAGE DOWN  
FIRST PAGE  
LAST PAGE  
LAST RESET  
CLEAR LOG  
SYSTEM LOG  
INSTALL INFO  
DIAGS  
Status  
MODEL 2200-2x SOFTWARE VERSION: 5.2  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-4. Status Menu Tree  
ON  
OFF  
KEY FILTER  
DITHER  
FREE RUN  
FRAME LOCK  
OFF  
FREE RUN  
MATTE DITHER  
FRAME LOCK  
SIGNAL PROCESS  
SAFE TITLE  
Misc  
ON  
SAFE TITLE  
OFF  
SAFE TITLE SELECT  
SAFE TITLE —  
SCREEN CTR  
TITLE & CTR  
X-HATCH  
SAFE TITLE H-POSITION  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-5. Misc Menu Tree  
4-6  
Menu Tree Structures  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
LAYERED  
STANDARD  
ON  
OFF  
KEY 1 OPACITY  
KEY 2 OPACITY  
KEY A OPACITY  
KEY B OPACITY  
M/E SELECT  
M/E MODE  
FULL ADD MIX  
M/E COPY  
M/E  
Mode  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
FROM M/E  
TO M/E  
DO M/E SWAP  
DO M/E COPY  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-6. M/E Mode Menu Tree  
4-7  
Section 4— Menu Trees  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
HORIZ KEY POSITION  
OPACITY  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEYA  
KEYB  
ON  
OFF  
AUTO  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEYA  
KEYB  
M/E SELECT  
KEYER SELECT  
FROM GROUP  
FROM KEYER  
WIPES  
TO GROUP  
TO KEYER  
EXCLUDE  
INCLUDE  
SHAPING  
KEYER COPY  
CALIBRATE  
Keyer  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
VIDEO PROCESS  
KEY 1 NAM  
DO KEYER SWAP  
DO KEYER COPY  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEYA  
KEYB  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEYA  
KEYB  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E SELECT  
BUS SELECT  
VIDEO PROCESS  
CORING  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
ON  
OFF  
LUM GAIN  
CHROMA GAIN  
DC OFFSET  
ON  
CORING  
OFF  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E SELECT  
NAM K2 INTO K1  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
ON  
OFF  
NAM SOFTNESS  
NAM OFFSET  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-7. Keyer Menu Tree  
4-8  
Menu Tree Structures  
M/E 1 KEY1  
M/E 1 KEY2  
M/E 2 KEY1  
M/E 2 KEY2  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
M/E 1 KEY1  
M/E 1 KEY2  
M/E 2 KEY1  
M/E 2 KEY2  
CHR KEY SELECT  
FOREGROUND VIDEO  
BACKGROUND VIDEO  
FOREGROUND CORING  
SECONDARY COLOR  
HUE MODS  
FOREGROUND CORING  
VARIABLE  
FIXED  
OFF  
Chroma  
Key  
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS ANGLE  
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS SELECTIVITY  
SEC CHROMA SUPPRESS LEVEL  
FRINGE CONTROL  
CHR KEY SELECT  
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS  
SUPPRESS MODE  
KEY ADJUST  
SETUP  
CHROMA  
LUMA  
SHADOW GAIN  
SHADOW CLIP  
M/E 1 KEY1  
M/E 1 KEY2  
M/E 2 KEY1  
M/E 2 KEY2  
SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS ANGLE  
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS  
CHR KEY SELECT  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
SEP HUE SUPPRESS  
FLARE SUPPRESS  
FGD NOISE SUPPRESS  
OFF  
HIGH  
MEDIUM  
LOW  
OFF  
M/E 1 KEY1  
M/E 1 KEY2  
M/E 2 KEY1  
M/E 2 KEY2  
ON  
KEY WIDTH  
OFF  
CHR KEY SELECT  
KEY WIDTH  
ON  
KEY SOFTNESS  
KEY SOFTNESS  
KEY POSITION  
FGD RESHAPING  
KEY S-SHAPING  
OFF  
HORIZ KEY POSITION  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
M/E 1 KEY1  
M/E 1 KEY2  
M/E 2 KEY1  
M/E 2 KEY2  
CHR KEY SELECT  
AUTO SETUP  
CANCEL  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-8. Chroma Key Menu Tree  
4-9  
Section 4— Menu Trees  
SUPERBLACK  
NORMAL  
SUPERBLACK  
NORMAL  
KEY 1 FILL  
KEY 1 BORD  
KEY 2 FILL  
KEY 2 BORD  
PRI WIPE  
BKGD 1 LUM  
BKGD 2 LUM  
Matte  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
BKGD  
2 TO 1  
1 TO 2  
MATTE 2  
MATTE 1  
BOTH  
MATTE COPY  
TEXTURE  
FROM GROUP  
FROM MATTE GEN  
SIDE SELECT  
SEC WIPE  
TO GROUP  
M/E 1  
TO MATTE GEN  
DO MATTE SWAP  
DO MATTE COPY  
M/E 2  
BKGD  
KEY 1 FILL  
KEY 1 BORD  
KEY 2 FILL  
KEY 2 BORD  
PRI WIPE  
SEC WIPE  
HORIZ STRETCH  
VERT MODE  
FILTER MODE  
LENGTH A  
1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1  
1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1, FREE RUN  
SMOOTHING  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
1, 2, 3, 4  
NOTCH  
NONE  
LENGTH B  
SOURCE  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-9. Matte Menu Tree  
4-10  
Menu Tree Structures  
M/E 1 PRI  
M/E 1 SEC  
M/E 2 PRI  
M/E 2 SEC  
PATTERN SELECT  
M/E1 PRI  
M/E1 SEC  
M/E2 PRI  
M/E2 SEC  
WIPE GEN SELECT  
HORIZ STRETCH  
VERT MODE  
FILTER MODE  
LENGTH A  
1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1  
1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1, FREE RUN  
SMOOTHING  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
NOTCH  
1, 2, 3, 4  
LENGTH B  
NONE  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
SOURCE  
M/E1 PRI  
M/E1 SEC  
M/E2 PRI  
M/E2 SEC  
PATTERN  
TEXTURE  
WIPE MODS  
WIPE COPY  
NAM–  
NAM+  
MIX  
WIPE  
WIPE GEN SELECT  
PTN MIX TYPE  
PTN MIX SOURCE  
SPLIT OFFSET  
TEXTURE  
NORMAL  
PST PTN DIRECTION  
WIPE MODULATE  
ON  
OFF  
SPLIT OFFSET  
M/E1 PRI  
M/E1 SEC  
M/E2 PRI  
M/E2 SEC  
REVERSE  
NORMAL  
LOCK  
HORIZ  
VERT  
OFF  
MODULATION AMPLITUDE  
WIPE GEN SELECT  
MODULATE  
MODULATE WAVEFORM  
MODULATION FREQUENCY  
TRIANGLE  
SINE  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
FROM GROUP  
FROM WIPE GEN  
TO GROUP  
PRI  
SEC  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
TO WIPE GEN  
DO WIPE SWAP  
DO WIPE COPY  
PRI  
Software Version 5.2  
SEC  
Figure 4-10. Wipe Menu Tree  
4-11  
Section 4— Menu Trees  
CLEAR REG  
LOCK REG  
CLEAR SEQ  
SELECT  
ALL  
BANK  
REG  
LOCK / UNLOCK / CLEAR  
LOCK / UNLOCK / CLEAR  
LOCK / UNLOCK / CLEAR  
CLEAR ALL HOLDS  
ALL HOLD  
SOURCE HOLD  
ON  
OFF  
BUS  
CLEAR ALL  
SET ALL  
DEVICE (##)  
ON  
OFF  
DEVICE NUMBER  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
MISC  
BKGD  
CHAN 1  
CHAN 2  
GLOBAL 1  
CAMERA  
DPM 2  
ENABLE  
DISABLE  
REGISTER  
SOURCE HOLD  
PERIPH DEVICES  
ON  
OFF  
TRANSITION  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEYA  
SELECT LEVEL  
PAUSE  
SELECT GROUP  
PATH TYPE  
RUN LEVER  
E-MEM  
KEYFRAME EDITING  
KF PATHS  
GPI & PBUS TRIGGERS  
KEYB  
WIPES  
WIPEXFORM  
ALL  
HOLD  
LINEAR  
S-LINEAR  
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H  
SELECT PERIPH  
ATTACH PERIPH  
FIRE (A–H)  
MISC  
OFF  
FIRE ATTACHED  
SELECT GPI  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or8  
ATTACH GPI  
FIRE (1–8)  
MISC  
OFF  
FIRE ATTACHED  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-11. E-MEM Menu Tree  
4-12  
Menu Tree Structures  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
PGM PST  
DSK  
MISC  
BKGD  
DPM 1  
DPM 2  
DPM 3  
DPM 4  
DELEGATES / ENABLES  
TIME ALIGN LEVELS  
SET START TIME  
RUN  
TIME KNOB SELECT  
RUN DEL  
START  
KF  
ZOOM  
EFF DUR  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
PGM PST  
DSK  
MISC  
BKGD  
DPM 1  
DPM 2  
DPM 3  
DPM 4  
SELECT LEVEL  
SELECT GROUP  
PATH TYPE  
TRANSISTION  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEYA  
KEYB  
WIPES  
WIPEXFORM  
ALL  
TIMELINE  
KF PATHS  
ENABLE  
DISABLE  
HOLD  
KEYFRAME EDITING  
RUN LEVER  
MOD ALL ABSOLUTE  
ENABLE BUTTONS  
ATTACH GPI  
LINEAR  
S-LINEAR  
CURVE  
ENABLE  
DISABLE  
KEY  
FRAME  
DELEGATES  
ENABLES  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATTACH TRIGGER  
SELECT GPI  
ATTACH  
FIRE GPI (1-8)  
FIRE ATTACHED  
ON  
OFF  
A
B
C
D
E
F
TRIGGER SELECT  
ATTACH  
FIRE (A-H)  
FIRE ATTACHED  
G
H
Software Version 5.3  
ON  
OFF  
Figure 4-12. Keyframe Menu Tree  
4-13  
Section 4— Menu Trees  
FROM PAGE  
TO PAGE  
KEY PROCESS  
DO COMPRESS  
COMPRESSION  
VIDEO STORE  
KEY STORE  
FROM STORE  
FROM PAGE  
TO PAGE  
FILTER PROCESS  
DO FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
SHADOW BLUR  
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY  
EMBOSS  
SHARPEN  
SOFTEN  
COMPRESS  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
DRP SHADOW BLUR  
LOCK VIDEO / KEY  
PICTURE PROCESS  
PARAM COPY  
VIDEO STORE  
BEVEL  
COPY  
BOTTOM  
TOP  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
FROM PAGE  
TO PAGE  
LIGHT SOURCE  
DO BEVEL  
Frame  
Store  
KEY STORE  
MASK STORE  
FROM STORE  
FROMPAGE  
TO STORE  
TO PAGE  
DO SWAP  
DO COPY  
VIDEO STORE  
KEY STORE  
See  
Part 2  
VIDEO STORE  
KEY STORE  
FROM STORE  
TO STORE  
DO SWAP  
VIDEO STORE  
KEY STORE  
DO COPY  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-13. Frame Store Menu Tree (part 1)  
4-14  
Menu Tree Structures  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
PAGE SELECT  
STROBE TIME PERIOD  
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD  
ON  
OFF  
POSTR/SOLR  
HUE MOD  
COLOR MOD  
CONTRAST  
ON  
OFF  
MOSAIC  
MOSAIC SIZE  
ON  
POSTERIZATION  
MOSAIC ASPECT  
OFF  
HUE MOD START PHASE  
HUE MOD END PHASE  
FIRST ACTIVE PIXEL  
REVERSE VIDEO  
UNSHAPE/RESHAPE  
MODE SELECT  
HUE MOD SATURATION  
BLACK HUE  
BLACK SAT  
POSTERIZE / HUE MOD  
/ COLOR MOD / CONTRAST  
SOLARIZE / HUE MOD PATH  
BLK/WHT DELEGATE  
BLACK BRIGHT  
SOLARIZATION  
ON  
OFF  
CW  
See  
Part 1  
CCW  
STROBE  
MOSAIC  
PSEUDO COLOR  
CROP  
REPOSITION  
FILTER  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
LEFT  
ON  
BLACK / WHITE HUE  
BLACK / WHITE SAT  
BLACK / WHITE BRIGHT  
CROP  
OFF  
DRP SHADOW BLUR  
LOCK VIDEO/KEY  
KEY STORE MODE  
PICTURE COPY  
PARAM COPY  
RIGHT  
COARSE ADJUST HORIZ  
FINE ADJUST HORIZONTAL  
ON  
OFF  
HORIZONTAL POSITION  
VERTICAL POSITION  
PIXEL DETENT  
Frame  
Store  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
COARSE ADJUST VERTICAL  
FINE ADJUST VERTICAL  
VIDEO STORE  
KEY STORE  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
MASK STORE  
*
OFF  
ON  
BLUR  
OFF  
CHROMA BLUR  
BLURE SEMETRY  
FILTER SELECT  
BLUR  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
SEPARATE LUM / CHROMA  
BLUR SYMMETRY  
LUM BLUR  
FILTER SELECT  
HUE ROTATE  
ON  
OFF  
HUE ANGLE  
PAGE SELECT  
STROBE TIME PERIOD  
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
LEFT  
ON  
OFF  
STROBE  
CROP  
ON  
OFF  
RIGHT  
CROP  
REPOSITION  
FILTER  
COARSE ADJUST HORIZ  
FINE ADJUST HORIZONTAL  
ON  
OFF  
HORIZONTAL POSITION  
VERTICAL POSITION  
PIXEL DETENT  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
COARSE ADJUST VERTICAL  
FINE ADJUST VERTICAL  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
OFF  
ON  
BLUR  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
Software Version 5.2  
BLUR  
BLUR SYMMETRY  
BLUR SYMMETRY  
DRAW  
ON  
DRAW MODE  
BRUSH SOURCE  
SAVE  
FILL SHAPE  
BLACK SCREEN  
WHITE SCREEN  
UNDO  
OFF  
STRAIGHT  
FREEHAND  
BLACK  
WHITE  
BRUSH OPACITY  
BRUSH SIZE  
BRUSH SOFTNESS  
* MASK STORE operation is enabled using the Frame Store module option.  
Figure 4-14. Frame Store Menu Tree (part 2)  
4-15  
Section 4— Menu Trees  
PVW BUS  
MASK BUS  
AUX BUS 1 – 5  
BUS SELECT  
EFF LOOP MODE  
E-MEM CONTROL  
NEAR SIDE  
FAR SIDE  
NO LOOP  
EXT LOOP  
FRAME STORE  
Aux  
Bus  
BOTH  
TAKE  
VIDEO  
KEY  
Software Version 5.2  
Figure 4-15. Aux Bus Menu Tree  
4-16  
Appendix A — Keyframe  
Path Control  
A
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls  
The path that an effect takes between keyframes may be adjusted  
through the CURVE path type selection from the Keyframe Path  
Menu.  
If CURVE is selected, three soft knobs are provided to control the  
three parameters of the vector. These are labeled: Tension,  
Continuity, and Bias.  
The adjustment of these controls can affect the keyframe path in  
various ways. Interactions between the controls are numerous  
and each will be described in the following paragraphs. You may  
want to experiment with the interactions by adjusting the controls  
in small increments.  
In the following examples, a physical path is shown between three  
keyframes. The first keyframe (KF1) is the upper left square; the  
last keyframe (KF3) is the lower right square. The adjustments in  
these examples are applied to the middle keyframe only (KF2).  
A-1  
   
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control  
Path Vectors  
With respect to the path between keyframes, each keyframe is  
made up of three vector parameters as shown below. The soft  
knob controls act on these vector parameters to adjust the path  
into (entry) and out of (exit) the keyframe. The path through KF2  
is parallel with an imaginary line drawn between KF1 and KF2.  
Tension Vector  
Bias  
+
KF1  
KF2  
Continuity Vectors  
KF3  
A-2  
 
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls  
Tension Control  
In the example below, the keyframes are at right angles so the  
(TENSION) control operates on a 45° line drawn through the  
keyframe. This line is referred to as the Tension Vector and is  
parallel to a line drawn between adjacent keyframes (see  
illustration).  
The (TENSION) soft knob controls the length of the tension vector.  
At a Tension setting of 0, this imaginary line extends an equal  
distance into and out of the keyframe, and the path through the  
middle keyframe is curved.  
The unmodified KF2 is said to have a correction value of 0 (see  
Example 1).  
Example 1  
Tension Vector  
KF1  
KF2  
Tension = 0.0  
KF3  
A-3  
 
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control  
In Example 2, the (TENSION) control is increased to 1.00, so that the  
Tension vector is shortened to non-existence through KF2.  
The path enters and leaves the middle keyframe in a straight line  
as it takes on an S-Linear motion; decelerating as it enters the  
middle keyframe and accelerating as it leaves.  
Example 2  
No Tension Vector  
KF1  
KF2  
Tension = 1.0  
KF3  
A-4  
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls  
In Example 3, the (TENSION) control has been set to -1.00. This  
produces an effect of lengthening the Tension vector, causing the  
path through the middle keyframe to be longer and broader.  
The longer path will appear to make the image speed up through  
KF2 as it travels from KF1 to KF3.  
Example 3  
Tension Vector  
KF2  
KF1  
Tension = -1.0  
KF3  
A-5  
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control  
Continuity Control  
The continuity adjustment determines the angle of the path into  
and out of the keyframe. It is represented by vectors at 90 degrees  
to each as shown in Example 4.  
Example 4  
Continuity Vectors  
+1.0  
+1.0  
-1.0  
KF1  
KF2  
-1.0  
Continuity = 0.0  
KF3  
The unmodified path shown above is identical to the unmodified  
path of the other controls.  
A-6  
 
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls  
With continuity set to 1.00, the entry path through the keyframe is  
pulled to point at the following keyframe or exit path. The effect  
of 1.00 continuity is that of motion dropping into and then out of  
the keyframe, similar to a bouncing ball (see Example 5).  
Example 5  
+1.0  
KF1  
+1.0  
-1.0  
KF2  
-1.0  
Continuity = 1.00  
KF3  
A-7  
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control  
With continuity set to -1.00, the paths between the keyframes  
become straight lines, accelerating through the keyframe (see  
Example 6).  
Example 6  
+1.0  
-1.0  
KF1  
+1.0  
KF2  
-1.0  
Continuity = -1.00  
KF3  
A-8  
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls  
Bias Control  
The (BIAS) control determines whether the path will be “pulled”  
towards the previous or the following keyframe. With extreme  
settings, all of the biasing will occur either before or after KF2.  
With bias set to 0, the curve through the keyframe is gentle as  
shown in Example 7 below.  
Example 7  
-
Tension Vector  
Bias Vector  
+
KF1  
KF2  
Bias = 0.0  
KF3  
NOTE: A Tension vector MUST be present for Bias control to have an  
effect.  
A-9  
 
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control  
With the bias set to 1.00, the path is pulled towards the previous  
keyframe. Entrance and exit to the keyframe are on a straight line  
from the previous keyframe (see Example 8), and the path of the  
effect travels completely through KF2 before turning towards  
KF3.  
Example 8  
-
+
Entry Bias  
KF1  
KF2  
Bias = 1.0  
Tension Vector  
KF3  
A-10  
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls  
With the bias set to -1.00, the path is pulled towards the following  
keyframe. Entrance and exit to the keyframe are a straight line  
pointed to the following keyframe (see Example 9).  
Example 9  
Exit Bias  
-
Tension Vector  
Bias  
+
KF1  
KF2  
Bias = -1.0  
KF3  
A-11  
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control  
A-12  
Index  
Symbols  
. Button 2-45  
Joy Stick Override 2-103  
A
Aspect Button 2-68  
Aspect Knob 2-68  
Attach GPI Menu 3-91  
Auto Delegation  
B
Control Panel 2-8  
Menu Delegation 2-10  
Auto delegation 2-8  
Auto Preview 2-29  
Bank 0 Button 2-41  
Bank Button 2-40  
Bkgd Button 2-47  
Border Button 2-28, 2-68  
Borderline  
Auto Recall Button 2-48  
Auto Run Button 2-48  
Auto Select Key Button 2-25  
Auto Setup Button 2-32  
Auto Trans Button 2-17  
Auto transition 2-19  
Aux 1 Through Aux 5 Buttons 2-90  
Aux Area  
Aux Bus Select 2-90  
Bus Delegate Buttons 2-89  
Effects Send Buttons 2-88  
Mask Bus 2-89  
Preview Bus 2-89  
Preview Only Buttons 2-88  
Source Select Buttons 2-88  
Aux Bus  
Controls 2-27  
Key Generation 1-14  
Opacity Knob 2-28  
Format Menu 3-49  
Panels (Remote) 2-100  
Size/ Position Knob 2-28  
Bottom/ Clip Knob 2-76  
Index-1  
 
Index  
Box Button 2-74  
Brightness Knob 2-35, 2-85  
Buttons  
DPM Map Inputs Menu 3-41  
External Interface Menu 3-31  
DPM Setup Menu 3-33  
FIELD 1 2-98  
FIELD 2 2-98  
FRZE 2-98  
Peripheral Interface Menu 3-44  
GRAB 2-98  
C
Camera Button 2-48  
Chan 1 Button 2-48  
Chan 2 Button 2-48  
Chop 2-102  
Name Crosspoint Button  
Menu 3-26  
Chroma Key  
Adjust Menu 3-70  
Button 2-22  
Hue Modifiers Menu 3-69  
Inputs Menu 3-27  
Menu 3-65  
Outputs Menu 3-30  
Chroma Key Adjust Menu 3-70  
Chroma Key Hue Modifiers Menu  
3-69  
Chroma Key Secondary Color  
Menu 3-67  
Chroma Key Setup Menu 3-72  
Secondary Color Menu 3-67  
Setup Menu 3-72  
Chroma Keyer Area 2-30  
Controls 2-31  
Delegation 2-31  
Delegation 2-8  
Positioner 2-64  
Chroma Knob 2-32  
Chromatte™ Chroma Keyer 1-14  
Clear Keyer Memory Menu 3-12  
Clip Knob 2-22  
Control Panel Areas  
Aux, Pvw, and Mask Source Select  
Area 2-87 to 2-93  
Chroma Keyer 2-30 to 2-32  
Effects Memory 2-36 to 2-63  
Keyer 2-21 to 2-29  
Clock (Setting) 3-20  
Configuration Menus 3-7 to 3-52  
Aux Bus Format Menu 3-49  
Clear Keyer Memory Menu 3-12  
DPM Map Aux Buses Menu 3-37  
Matte 2-33 to 2-35  
Index-2  
Index  
Preview/ Aux Bus Source Select and  
Delegate Area 2-  
E-MEM Registers 2-37  
Enable Buttons 2-47  
87 to 2-93  
Source Selection Area 2-4  
Wipe Area 2-65 to 2-72  
Copy Button 2-56  
Learning Effects 2-37  
Crosspoint  
E-MEM Override 2-38  
Crosspoint Name Display 2-7  
Cut Button 2-20, 2-56  
Effects Send 1-15  
D
Date (Setting) 3-20  
Define Defaults Menu 3-17  
Deletion Modes 2-53  
Disk Menu 3-131  
Load File Menu 3-134  
Save File Menu 3-136  
Name File Menu 3-138  
Utilities Menu 3-139  
. Button 2-45  
DPM Aux Bus Menu 3-36  
DPM Map Aux Buses Menu 3-37  
DPM Map Inputs Menu 3-41  
DPM Setup Menu 3-33  
DPOPs 2-10  
DROP SHOW Knob 2-97  
Dropshadows 2-81, 2-97  
Keypad 2-39  
Learning Effects 2-37  
Modes of Insertion/ Deletion 2-53  
Modify All Keyframes (Relative) 2-59  
E
Peripheral Devices Menu 3-88  
Source Hold Menu 3-87  
E-MEM Register Menu 3-83  
Enable All Button 2-48  
Enter Button 2-41  
Edit Enable Button 2-82  
Editor Interface Menu 3-32  
Effect Dis Button 2-43  
Effect Dur Button 2-60  
Effect Indicator 2-14  
External Interface  
Effects Memory Area 2-36  
Constant Duration Off 2-54  
Area 2-82  
Menu 3-31  
Index-3  
Index  
Extrude Button 2-28  
F
Features, optional 1-3  
Features, standard 1-2  
FIELD 1 Button 2-98  
FIELD 1 or 2 Button 2-80  
FIELD 2 Button 2-98  
Field Mode 2-80, 2-99  
Flat Matte Button 2-35, 2-85  
Flip Flop Button 2-70  
Floppy Disk Drive 2-86  
Force Mask Button 2-29, 2-74  
Four-Field Mode 2-80, 2-99  
Frame Store 1-15  
I
After Button 2-55  
Before Button 2-54  
Area 2-95  
Menu 3-107  
option 2-77 to 2-81  
Shadow Controls 2-97  
Insertion Modes 2-53  
FRZE Button 2-80, 2-98  
G
Joy Stick Override 2-103  
Gain Knob 2-22  
Get Button 2-50  
Global Button 2-48  
Go To  
Kf Button 2-60  
Time Button 2-60  
GPI  
Enable Button 2-83  
Inputs Menu 3-28  
GRAB Button 2-98  
GRAB button 2-80  
K1 Border Indicator 2-34  
K1 Fill Indicator 2-34  
K2 Border Indicator 2-34  
Kaleidoscope Sources Mapping, DPM 3-36  
KEY  
STORE Button 2-79  
Key  
Input Selection 2-4  
Primary Inputs 2-5  
Still Image Storage 2-97  
H
H Multi Button 2-71  
Index-4  
Index  
Key 1 Button 2-13, 2-22  
Key 1 NAM Menu 3-63  
Key 2 Button 2-13, 2-22  
Key Delegation Lamps 2-6  
Key On Indicator 2-22  
Key Over Button 2-26  
Key Priority Button 2-13  
Key Source Buttons 2-25  
Key Store  
L
Crop Menu 3-125  
Filter Menu 3-127  
Lum Knob 2-32  
Menu 3-124  
Reposition Menu 3-126  
Key Type Buttons 2-22  
Keyer Area 2-21  
M
Auto Preview 2-29  
Borderline® Controls 2-27  
Key Source Buttons 2-25  
Key Type Buttons 2-22  
Keyer Delegation Buttons 2-22  
Mask Control 2-29  
M/ E 1  
Split Key 2-26  
M/ E 2  
Keyer Copy Menu 3-61  
Keyer Delegation Buttons 2-22  
Keyer Menu 3-59  
Key 1 NAM Menu 3-63  
Keyer Copy Menu 3-61  
Video Process Menu 3-62  
Keyer Preferences Menu 3-11  
Keyframe Menu 3-93  
Attach GPI Menu 3-91  
Keyframe Path Menu 3-89  
Keyframe Path Menu 3-89  
Keypad 2-39  
Pvw Button 2-88  
Sec Button 2-66  
Map Inputs Menu 3-24, 3-43  
Mark  
KF Dur Button 2-59  
Knobs  
DROP SHOW 2-97  
H POSITION 2-97  
OPACITY 2-97  
V POSITION 2-97  
Block Button 2-61  
Button 2-61  
Cursor Button 2-53  
Krystal, setup 3-34  
Index-5  
Index  
Mask  
Video Store Filter 3-122, 3-123  
Bus Button 2-75  
Button 2-89  
Control 2-29  
Invert Button 2-76  
Menu 3-104  
Select Area 2-87  
Mask Selection  
Bus Delegate Buttons 2-89  
Mask Bus Selection 2-89  
MASK STORE Button 2-79  
Masks Area 2-73 to 2-76  
Delegation buttons 2-74  
Mask Controls 2-75  
Source Selection 2-74, 2-88  
Matte 2 Button 2-35, 2-85  
Matte Background Area 2-84  
Matte Select Buttons 2-84  
Modifier controls 2-85  
Matte Copy Menu 3-106  
Matte Fill Button 2-24  
Matte Generator Area 2-33  
Delegation 2-34  
Menus  
Matte Menus 3-105 to 3-107  
MATTE SELECT Indicators 2-34  
Modifier controls 2-35  
Matte Menu 3-105  
Matte Copy Menu 3-106  
Matte Select Button 2-34  
Menu  
Mix Button 2-15  
Buttons 3-3  
Delegation 2-10, 3-4  
Key Store 3-124  
Modes  
Field 2-80, 2-99  
Key Store Crop 3-125  
Key Store Filter 3-127  
Key Store Reposition 3-126  
Knobs 3-3  
Four-Field 2-80, 2-99  
Replicate 2-80, 2-99  
Shadow 2-81, 2-97  
Posterization/ Solarization 3-116  
Pseudo Color Contrast 3-118  
Pseudo Color Hue Modification 3-116  
Pseudo Color Modification 3-117  
Video Store 3-112  
Modes of Insertion/ Deletion 2-53  
Constant Duration Off 2-54  
Constant Duration On 2-57  
Modify All Keyframes (Relative) 2-59  
Modify Button 2-58  
Index-6  
Index  
Modify Keyframes 2-58  
Delegate Area 2-  
87 to 2-93  
Wipe Area 2-65 to 2-72  
Paste Button 2-57  
. Button 2-45  
N
Name Crosspoint Button Menu 3-26  
Name File Menu 3-138  
Next Button 2-60  
Next transition buttons 2-13  
Normal Button 2-27, 2-70  
Periph Enable Button 2-83  
Peripheral  
Positioner Joystick 2-64  
Preset  
Preview Preferences Menu 3-13  
Pri Wipe  
O
OPACITY Knob 2-81, 2-97  
Opacity Knob 2-68  
Options  
Borderline Key Edge Generation 1-14  
Chromatte Advanced Chroma Keyer  
1-14  
Effects Send 1-15  
Frame Store 1-15  
Look Ahead Preview 1-15  
Remote Aux Bus 1-16  
Secondary Wipe Generator 1-14  
Tally Relay 1-15  
Timed Aux Output 1-16  
Outline Button 2-28  
Outputs  
Button 2-74  
Indicator 2-34  
Wash Button 2-35, 2-85  
Menu 3-30  
Routing Frame Store 2-79, 2-96  
Over Indicator 2-14, 2-27  
Modification Menu 3-117  
Put Button 2-51  
Pvw Button 2-89  
Pvw Select area 2-87  
Pvw/ Aux Area  
P
Panel Areas  
Aux, Pvw, and Mask Source Select  
Area 2-87 to 2-93  
Chroma Keyer 2-30 to 2-32  
Delegation 2-8  
Effects Memory 2-36 to 2-63  
Keyer 2-21 to 2-29  
Aux Bus Select 2-90  
Bus Delegate Buttons 2-89  
Effects Send Buttons 2-88  
Index-7  
Index  
Mask Bus 2-89  
Preview Bus 2-89  
Preview Only buttons 2-88  
Source Select Buttons 2-88  
R
Shadow  
Random Button 2-66  
Recalling Effects 2-38  
Re-entry Buttons 2-6  
Remote Aux Bus 1-16  
Remote Aux Bus Panels 2-100  
Chop 2-102  
Joy Stick Override 2-103  
Rear Panel Switches 2-102  
Remote Aux Operation 2-102  
Source Selection 2-101  
Replicate Mode 2-80, 2-99  
Reverse Button 2-63, 2-70  
Rewind Button 2-63  
Right Knob 2-76  
Signal Processing Menu 3-129  
Softness Knob 2-67  
Secondary Source Selection 2-6  
Split Button 2-71  
Rot Pos Button 2-69  
Rotate  
Knob 2-69  
Mag Button 2-69  
Split Key  
Speed Button 2-69  
Run  
Indicator 2-26  
Key 2-79, 2-97  
Button 2-62  
Controls 2-61  
Lever Arm 2-63  
Stop Next KF Button 2-62  
S
Subpanel  
Safe Title Menu 3-130  
Saturation/ Offset Knob 2-35  
Saturation/ Softness Knob 2-85  
Save File Menu 3-136  
Sec Wipe  
Frame Store 2-77  
Symmetry Knob 2-68  
System Parameters Menu 3-18  
Button 2-75  
Index-8  
Index  
T
Tally Relay 1-15  
Texture Button 2-66  
Time  
Video Store  
Cursor Button 2-53  
Setting 3-20  
Timed Aux Output 1-16  
Top/ Gain Knob 2-76  
Tran Rate Button 2-46  
Transition Areas 2-12  
Next Transition Buttons 2-13  
Layered Mode 2-14  
Standard Mode 2-13  
Transition Controls 2-17  
Transition Type 2-15  
Transition Controls 2-17  
Transition type buttons 2-15 to 2-17  
W
Width Knob 2-68  
Wipe Pattern Modifiers 2-71  
Wipe Positioner Buttons 2-71  
Wipe Rotation Controls 2-69  
U
Uncal Indicators 2-6  
Undo Button 2-45  
User 1—User 6 Buttons 2-67  
User Preferences Menu 3-9  
User Wipe Undo Button 2-67  
Utilities Menu 3-139  
Wipe Menu 3-73  
Wipe Modulation Menu 3-77  
Wipe Pattern Menu 3-74  
Wipe Texture Menu 3-75  
V
V Multi Button 2-71  
V POSITION Knob 2-81, 2-97  
Video  
Input Selection 2-4  
Primary Inputs 2-5  
Still Image Storage 2-97  
Video Fill Button 2-24  
Video Key Button 2-25  
Video Process Menu 3-62  
Index-9  
Index  
Index-10  

West Bend Blender 3000 User Manual
Teac Car Stereo System CD P140 User Manual
Sony SR21 User Manual
Sony NSR 1050H User Manual
Sony CD DH899N User Manual
Sony CCD TRV56E User Manual
Samsung SDC 435 User Manual
Samsung GH68 17668A User Manual
Samsung EC PL210ZBPUUS User Manual
Samsung D303D(i) User Manual